Sie sind auf Seite 1von 377

fineline6

Service Manual

R1-R2

fineline6

CONTENTS
INTRODUCTION
I. SAFETY GUIDE (Precautions on Maintenance and Inspection) ..................................i
II. DESCRIPTION OF SIGNAL WORDS .........................................................................vii
II. ERLUTERUNG DER SIGNALWRTER....................................................................viii
III. DESCRIPTION OF WARNING AND CAUTION LABELS...........................................ix
III. BESCHREIBUNG VON WARNUNG-UND VORSICHT-ETIKETTEN..........................xii
IV. LIST OF WARNING AND CAUTION LABELS AND WHERE TO ATTACH.................xv
1. LOCATION DIAGRAM OF CIRCUIT BOARD..............................................................-1
2. IMPORTANT NOTICE WHEN YOU HANDLE BOARDS
OR POWER SUPPLY UNITS ......................................................................................-1
3. EXPLANATION OF CIRCUIT BOARD.........................................................................-1
Input Station ............................................................................................................-1
3-1. AFC-CPU Circuit Board (2700H1130).............................................................-1
3-2. DC-TRM board (2700H1140) ..........................................................................-7
3-3. SCANNER DRIVING board (56GA-9090-00)..................................................-10
3-4. LS-LED-A board (2700H1100) ........................................................................-12
3-5. LS-LED-B board (27001110) .......................................................................-13
3-6. 135LED board (27001340) ..........................................................................-15
3-7. SENS-A board (2700H1320)...........................................................................-17
3-8. SENS-B board (2700H1330)...........................................................................-18
3-9. 240LED board (2700H1380) ...........................................................................-19
3-10. MAG-AMP board (2700H1390) .....................................................................-20
3-11. PD-AMP board (2700H1300) ........................................................................-22
3-12. FMS board (2700H1370) ..............................................................................-26
3-13. LED-LAMP board (2700H1360) ....................................................................-28
Printer ......................................................................................................................-29
3-14. HDC-PCI Circuit Board (2710H1000)............................................................-29
3-15. HEAD-BUFF Circuit Board (2710H1010) ......................................................-32
3-16. PRINTER-CPU Circuit Board (2710H1020) ..................................................-41
3-17. LCD-CPU Circuit Board (2710H1030)...........................................................-48
3-18. PSA Circuit Board (2710H1040) ...................................................................-51
3-19. SDU-DRV Circuit Board (2710H1200) ..........................................................-55
3-20. EFU-DRV Circuit Board (2710H1210)...........................................................-59
3-21. PFU-DRV Circuit Board (2710H1230)...........................................................-62
3-22. SCANNER DRIVING board (56GA-9090-00)................................................-66
3-23. HEAD-TRM board (2710H1220) ...................................................................-68
3-24. Fluorescent print head power supply board (271076903).............................-70
3-25. Inverter board (584076302A) ........................................................................-72
Processor ................................................................................................................-73
3-26. Processor-CPU (3590H1500) .......................................................................-73
3-27. Processor-Drive (3850H1510).......................................................................-89

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

4. CIRCUIT DIAGRAM ....................................................................................................-1


4-1. BLOCK DIAGRAM ...............................................................................................-1
DS-1000U/DS-100T/DS-1000 HARDWARE BLOCK DIAGRAM ........................-1
DP-1000E/DP-1000 HARDWARE BLOCK DIAGRAM........................................-2
4-2. WIRING DIAGRAM..............................................................................................-3
DS-1000/DS-1000U (1/2)....................................................................................-3
DS-1000/DS-1000U (2/2)....................................................................................-4
DS-1000T (1/2) ...................................................................................................-5
DS-1000T (2/2) ...................................................................................................-6
240AFC...............................................................................................................-7
Universal Carrier .................................................................................................-8
PRINTER (1/6)....................................................................................................-9
PRINTER (2/6)....................................................................................................-10
PRINTER (3/6)....................................................................................................-11
PRINTER (4/6)....................................................................................................-12
PRINTER (5/6)....................................................................................................-13
PRINTER (6/6)....................................................................................................-14
5. EXPLANATION OF POWER SUPPLY UNIT ...............................................................-1
5-1. Input station .........................................................................................................-1
5-2. Printer Processor .................................................................................................-1
5-3. SUP1: Check procedures against a case where 5-volt power is not output ........-2
6. MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION OF INPUT SECTION (DS-1000U/T).................-1
6-1. Air filter.................................................................................................................-1
6-1-1. Cleaning air filter (Monthly operation) ..........................................................-1
6-2. Light source .........................................................................................................-2
6-2-1. Cleaning dichroic mirror (Every three month) ..............................................-2
6-2-2. Replacing diffusion film (upper) (Replace it as needed) ..............................-3
6-2-3. Cleaning diffusion film (lower) (Monthly operation) ......................................-4
6-2-4 Replacing LS-LED B and LS-LED A boards .................................................-5
6-3. Film Scanner........................................................................................................-6
6-3-1. Replacing scanning section .........................................................................-6
6-3-2. Replacing driving speed changer.................................................................-26
6-3-3. Check dirt on drive gears .............................................................................-29
6-3-4. Replacing scanner driver board ...................................................................-30
6-3-5. Replacing power supply ...............................................................................-31
6-3-6. Replacing AFC CPU board/DC TRM board .................................................-34
6-3-7. Replacing fan ...............................................................................................-34
6-4. 135AFC................................................................................................................-35
6-4-1. Replacing 135LED board .............................................................................-35
6-4-2. Replacing PD-AMP board ............................................................................-36
6-4-3. Cleaning sensor ...........................................................................................-38
6-4.4. Cleaning the cleaning brushes (upper and lower)........................................-39
6-4-5. Replacing timing belt....................................................................................-41
6-4-6. Replacing rod lens .......................................................................................-43
6-5. Input-unit PC ........................................................................................................-44
6-5-1. Replacing input-unit PC ...............................................................................-44

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

7. MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION OF PRINTER SECTION (DP-1000E) ...............-1


7-1. Air filter.................................................................................................................-1
7-1-1. Cleaning air filter ..........................................................................................-1
7-2. Magazine Mounting section .................................................................................-3
7-2-1. Check and replace pin slide plate ................................................................-3
7-2-2. Replace light shield ......................................................................................-4
7-2-3. Check operation of lock lever .......................................................................-4
7-2-4. Clean photo sensor ......................................................................................-5
7-2-5. Clean and replace entrance sensors (two sensors).....................................-5
7-2-6. Clean and replace Magazine-Data board ....................................................-6
7-3. Operation Panel ...................................................................................................-7
7-3-1. Replacing LCD-CPU board and inverter power supply................................-7
7-3-2. Replacing operation touch panel and LCD module......................................-8
7-4. Printer-Unit PC.....................................................................................................-12
7-4-1. Replacing printer-unit PC.............................................................................-12
7-4-2. Replacing HDC-PCI board ..........................................................................-18
7-5. Sub drive..............................................................................................................-19
7-5-1. How to remove sub drive..............................................................................-19
7-5-2. Cleaning inside paper dust duct (Every six month)......................................-20
7-5-3. Cleaning flap plate sensor ...........................................................................-21
7-5-4. Replacing cutter unit ....................................................................................-23
7-5-5. Replacing three timing belts.........................................................................-25
7-5-6. Cleaning two cutter sensors, duct detection sensor,
and crimp-style solenoid sensors (upper and lower) ...................................-26
7-5-7. Cleaning rollers (annually) ...........................................................................-27
7-5-8. Replacing SDU-DRV board..........................................................................-31
7-6. Exposure unit / Exposure feed unit ......................................................................-32
7-6-1. Replacing exposure unit...............................................................................-32
7-6-2. Replacing cables (HBCN4 assembly (white),
HTCN1 assembly (black)), fluorescent printer head power
supply boards, and HEAD-TRM board ........................................................-49
7-6-3. Replacing boards (EFU DRIVE board and SCANNER DRIVER board) ......-52
7-6-4. Replacing timing belts (two belts) ................................................................-54
7-6-5. Greasing cams (Every one year) .................................................................-55
7-6-6. Cleaning press-fit sensor .............................................................................-55
7-7. Exposure processing section ...............................................................................-56
7-7-1. Replacing PRINTER-CPU board and/or HEAD-BUF board.........................-56
7-8. Feeding unit .........................................................................................................-57
7-8-1. How to remove feed unit ..............................................................................-57
7-8-2. Cleaning rollers and paper transfer surface (Yearly operation) ....................-58
7-8-3. Cleaning and replacing sensors...................................................................-59
7-8-4. Replacing timing belt and applying grease ..................................................-60
7-8-5. Replacing PFU-DRV board ..........................................................................-61
7-8-6. Replacing fan ...............................................................................................-61
7-8-7. Replacing print head ....................................................................................-62
7-9. Power supply........................................................................................................-63
7-9-1. Replacing power supply (including replacement of PSA board and fan) .....-63

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

8. MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION OF PROCESSOR SECTION ............................-1


8-1. J-module II ...........................................................................................................-1
8-1-1. Cleaning and replacement procedure for the drum of J module II ...............-1
8-1-2. Inspection and replacement procedures for J module II packing ASSY ......-6
8-2. Checking the paper curls .....................................................................................-12
9. REPLACING THE BATTERY (PC)...............................................................................-1
9-1. Replacing the Battery (KIC-1E) ...........................................................................-1
10. PERIODIC REPLACEMENT PARTS .........................................................................0-1
Yearly replacement parts........................................................................................0-4
Two-yearly replacement parts ................................................................................0-4
Three-yearly Replacement Parts............................................................................0-5
Miscellaneous Parts ...............................................................................................0-6
Drawing showing yearly replacement parts............................................................0-7
Drawing showing two-yearly replacement parts .....................................................0-11
Drawing showing three-yearly replacement parts ..................................................0-18
How to replace yearly replacement parts ...............................................................0-21
10-1. Procedure for replacing bearing (385002426A) ............................................0-21
10-2. Procedure for replacing water-absorbing roller (385002407B) .....................0-22
10-3. Procedure for replacing idler gear (385002416B) .........................................0-22
10-4. Procedure for replacing idler gear assembly (3850A2408C) ........................0-23
10-5. Procedure for replacing gear (385002215B) .................................................0-23
10-6. Procedure for replacing roller (C) (251602602A) ..........................................0-24
How to replace two-yearly replacement parts ........................................................0-26
10-7. Procedure for replacing timing belt (rack drive shaft) (AAAA90200171) .......0-26
10-8. Procedure for replacing gear (385002214A) .................................................0-28
10-9. Procedure for replacing gear (385002216B) .................................................0-30
10-10. Procedure for replacing idler gear (C) (355002635B) .................................0-32
10-11. Procedure for replacing idler gear (A) (355002221B) .................................0-33
10-12. Procedure for replacing bearing (AAAA90100184) .....................................0-34
10-13. Procedure for replacing bearing (AAAA90100185) .....................................0-35
10-14. Procedure for replacing gear (385002215B) ...............................................0-36
10-15. Procedure for replacing loading spring (A) (355002444A) ..........................0-38
10-16. Procedure for replacing idler gear (B) (355002425B) .................................0-39
10-17. Procedure for replacing loading spring (C) (355002446A)..........................0-40
10-18. Procedure for replacing filter retainer (temperature control bath)
(385001006A) .............................................................................................0-41
10-19. Procedure for replacing anti-evaporation cover (3850A2202A)...................0-42
10-20. Procedure for replacing helical wheel (left) (385002212B) .........................0-42
10-21. Procedure for replacing helical wheel (right) (396033127B) .......................0-43
10-22. Procedure for replacing worm gear (355002232A) .....................................0-46
10-23. Procedure for replacing thrust washer (355002227A).................................0-47
10-24. Procedure for replacing loading spring (355002260A)................................0-48
10-25. Procedure for replacing loading spring (355002230A)................................0-49
10-26. Procedure for replacing loading spring 121 (251602213A).........................0-50
10-27. Procedure for replacing bearing (355002229A) ..........................................0-51
10-28. Procedure for replacing gear E (355002251A)............................................0-52

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

10-29. Procedure for replacing gear (355002213A) ...............................................0-52


10-30. Procedure for replacing bearing (355002230A) ..........................................0-53
10-31. Procedure for replacing bearing (355002234B) ..........................................0-54
How to replace three-yearly replacement parts......................................................0-55
10-32. Procedure for replacing rubber roller (A) (385002401A) .............................0-55
10-33. Procedure for replacing rubber roller (B) (385002432A) .............................0-56
10-34. Procedure for replacing loading spring (B) (355002445B) ..........................0-57
Miscellaneous Parts ...............................................................................................0-58
10-35. Procedure for replacing hooks (385002413A and 385002412A) ................0-58
10-36. Procedure for cleaning diffuser film (top) (270002016C)
and light guide (top side) (270002018C).....................................................0-59
11. APPLICATION DATA BACKUP AND RELOADING PROCEDURES ........................1-1
11-1. Backing up Data.................................................................................................1-1
11-1-1. Input station (When backing up the data to the A drive
on the FD drive:)........................................................................................1-1
11-1-2. Backing up the printer data (When backing up the data to the
A drive on the FD drive:)............................................................................1-3
11-2. Retrieving Data Backed up ................................................................................1-5
11-2-1. Retrieval the data backed up from the input station
(When retrieving the data from the A drive on the FD drive:)....................1-5
11-2-2. Retrieval the data backed up from the printer
(When retrieving the data from the A drive on the FD drive:)....................1-7
12. R1 SUPER VERSION UP PROCEDURE FOR DS-1000 & DP-1000 .......................2-1
13. EPSON ES-2200 UPGRADING PROCEDURE ........................................................3-1
13-1. EPSON ES-2200 driver "2.1.0.100" installation procedure................................3-1
13-2. EPSON ES-2200 driver upgrading procedure
from different firmware version to "2.1.0.100" ...................................................3-6
14. FPGA PROGRAM WRITING PROCEDURE .............................................................4-1
15. DS-1000 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE TO V1.03R01 BY
APPLICATION CD-ROM ...........................................................................................5-1
16. DP-1000 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE TO V1.03R01 BY
APPLICATION CD-ROM ...........................................................................................6-1
17. APPENDIX: CHECK SHEET .....................................................................................7-1

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

I. SAFETY GUIDE (Precautions on Maintenance and Inspection)


Precautions on installing and using this system
Read this manual carefully before using this system.
Before operating this system, make sure you understand and observe the following important
precautions.
1.

This equipment is used to expose and process photographic paper by using exposed film and digital
media (e.g., CD-ROM, floppy disk, flatbed scanner). Do not use this equipment for other purposes.

2.

To maintain safe and optimum functionality, operate this system properly according to the manual.

3.

Keep this manual near the system, and always observe all precautions and follow all instructions.

4.

Observe the warnings mentioned in this manual and caution labels. See Safety Guide, Description
of Signal Words and Description of Warning and Caution Labels for details.

5.

Do not install this system on an inclined or otherwise uneven floor, and avoid direct exposure to the
sunlight. Do not position any lighting fixtures within 2m from the negative film carrier.

6.

Be sure to install a ventilating fan in the room where this equipment is installed to protect the
operators against gas, heat, odor and high humidity.

7.

This system is not equipped with a cooling unit. Be sure to use in the following environment.
Operate this system under an ambient temperature of 18C-28C and relative humidity of 30%-80%.

8.

Since this system is grounded with a three-wire power cord, do not disconnect the grounding wire in
order to avoid electric shock.

9.

There are ventilating holes on the cabinet to prevent rises in temperature. Never block these holes
with any objects.

10. Never stick your hands or any objects into the ventilation holes because the ventilating fans are
operating. Electric shock or other injury may result. Also refrain from touching the processor's printer
connector when the equipment is turned on.
11. In the case of continuous use for long hours, take a rest for around 10 minutes by one hour to
give your eyes a rest.
12. Use the monitor at the distance of 80 cm in a bright room.
Avoid using at the place where the sun ray or light reflects at the right angle.
13. Do not turn the processor on without docking it with the printer.
14. Be sure to contact your service engineer when installing, collecting, relocating or repacking the
equipment.
15. Do not peel caution labels off the system.
16. Should the manual or any caution label be damaged, replace with new ones.
17. To purchase additional manuals or caution labels, contact your nearest Konica dealer.

Should any trouble occur


1 Turn off the power switch on the system

2 Turn off the breaker on the distribution panel

3 Contact Konica

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

Precautions for Processing Solution


1.

Some tablets and processing solutions (concentrate solutions and solutions used, hereafter referred
to as processing solutions) use non-medicinal poisonous chemicals which are irritants and / or which
may be harmful if swallowed. Some processing solutions may also be skin or eye irritants, and may
cause allergic reactions with repeated exposure. Please use care when handling tablets and
processing solutions.

2.

Wear safety goggles, gloves, and work clothes when handling processing solution to prevent direct
contact with your skin. Also, make sure that the work area contains ventilation fans, and is properly
ventilated when working with processing solutions.

3.

If you directly touch the solution in tanks or processing solution, or if you conduct operation that may
lead to direct contact, wash your hands with soap and plenty of water after completing operation.

4.

Processing solution may discolored or otherwise stain clothing.

5.

Emergency measures for processing solution.


Should tablets or processing solution be swallowed, rinse your mouth out with water or drink one or
two cups (180ml or more) of water. When instructed to do so by a doctor, induce vomiting to
disgorge swallowed tablets or processing solution, then seek immediate medical treatment.
Should processing solution get into your eyes, immediately wash your eyes out in running water for
15 minutes, then seek immediate medical treatment.
If you touch processing solution directly, wash it off with a plenty of water. If any symptoms appear,
consult a physician. There is a possibility of agents causing allergic reactions with repeated
exposure.

6.

Do not mix with hypochlorites (industrial or household bleach).

7.

Dispose of package for processing solution in accordance with state and local regulations.

8.

Please have disposal of chemicals performed by an authorized chemical disposal agent.

ii

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

Precautions for Disposal of This System and Packing Materials


Precautions for Disposal of This System

When disposing of this machine, consult federal state and/or local regulations for the proper
disposal method.
When disposing of the equipment, be sure to treat it as follows before delivering it to the waste
collector.
Remove processing solution and carefully wash each rack and processing tank.
Cut pipe hoses, remove remaining solution and wash carefully.
Be careful not to allow the processing solution to leak into the environment.
Dispose of process filters after completely washing them.
Collection and recycling of the personal computer used in this machine is the responsibility of the
computer maker.
The backup battery (lead acid battery) used with this equipment must be disposed of in accordance with
state and local regulations.
Please contact your contract-specified maintenance company for removal, collection, and recycling.
The battery must be removed (replaced or disposed of) by a service engineer; contact your local
maintenance company.
Regarding the method of disposal, be sure to observe the applicable laws and regulations of your
country or state.
The accessory hardware keys may no longer be necessary in the case of having purchased multiple
options. In consideration of recent regulations on industrial waste, a service engineer will collect any
hardware keys no longer required and take responsibility for disposing of them in the proper manner.
Your understanding and cooperation are appreciated.

Precautions for Disposal of Packing Materials

Regarding the method of packaging materials disposal, be sure to observe the applicable laws and
regulations of your country or state.
Since resin-containing package materials may be considered regulated wastes, be sure to deliver
them to authorized collectors of regulated wastes.

iii

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

Precautions for Maintenance and Inspection


This system has been checked in accordance with laws pertaining to various product safety regulations
before leaving the factory. Be sure to observe the following precautions whenever servicing this system.
1.

Never perform any unspecified dissembling, modification, adjustment, or servicing with parts not
specified in the manual.
Never open or remove any unspecified covers because you may expose yourself to high voltage
resulting in electric shock and serious burns.

2.

Be sure to turn off all power sources when performing specified maintenance as outlined in the
manual.
If the power is not turned off, you may expose yourself to electric shock or other injury.

3.

Do not run the power cord through locations where the cord may be crushed or stepped on.

4.

When unplugging the power cord, make sure that the power has been completely turned off, and
remove the plug from the socket by pulling on the plug connector section, not the power cable.
(Use the same method for plugging in the unit)

5.

Use a dry cloth for cleaning. Should water spill inside the equipment, turn the power off and
contact the Konica Service Department.

6.

Make sure that all screw and parts that are removed for maintenance are put back into place
before turning the power back on.

7.

Before moving this system, turn the power off, then disconnect the power cord and connection
cables. Be sure to drain all processing solution from each tank before moving this system.

8.

Check for dust in the plug and socket of the power cord. Perform cleaning once a year.

9.

Never modify or alter this system for any reason.

10. Do not use unspecified replacement parts.


11. Precautions on Heating Sections (Units)
The lamp, which is used as a light source, the chemical solution heater, drying heater and
motors all generate heat.
Be sure that these parts have fully cooled down before initiating maintenance and inspection.
Regarding the lamp, turn off the lamp and allow it to cool for 15 minutes. Once the temperature
has dropped, turn off the breaker and main power switch before starting the maintenance
activity.The cooling time for the heaters and motors varies depending on the duration of
operation. After turning off the breaker and main power switch of this equipment, allow sufficient
cooling time before starting operation.
If you burn yourself, immediately cool the burned area under running water and seek medical
treatment.

iv

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

IMPORTANT NOTICE
Due to the potential danger to an inexperienced person servicing this system, as well as the risk of
damaging the system, KONICA CORPORATION, Japan, strongly recommends that all servicing only
be performed by the Konica-trained service engineers.

Should any user (trained by Konica) need to perform an emergency operation not specified in the
Instruction Manual or User Maintenance Manual, first contact Konica to receive instructions before
performing the operation. At the same time, be sure to observe the following general precautions.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

Turn off all power sources.


Do not use fuses other than those of the specified ratings.
Never modify any electric circuit, for any reason.
Never pull out cords when removing connectors.
Do not step on the power cord or otherwise crush it.
After parts replacement or maintenance, be careful not to touch the burrs or sharp edges of the
casing when wiring. Never touch movable parts or the drive section, in particular, when wiring.
7. Carefully clean off any electric parts contaminated with processing solution.
8. When removing any unit this system, always disconnect and reinstall the unit by holding the metal
part or green marked part of its body to prevent the breakage.
9. Before removing circuit boards, switches or sensors in the system, discharge static electricity from
your body by touching other metal part of the system.
10. Never perform unspecified maintenance or modification.
11. Do not use unspecified replacement parts.
12. Make sure that screws and parts removed for maintenance are set back into place.
13. Do not make the interlock switch ineffective by inserting paper or other material.

Cautions for lithium battery


The lithium battery mounted on the mother board is designed as a replaceable battery.
This battery has a built-in combustible substance such as lithium and organic solvent. If you make a
mistake in replacement method, heat generation, ignition or rupture may occur. Replace the battery
with the one having a correct rating.
Lithium battery: Model CR2023
When you have to replace the battery (lithium battery), be sure to contact a service engineer.
Replacement must be made by a service engineer.

The backup battery (sealed lead battery) contained in this


equipment is automatically charged when power is turned on.
Be sure to contact your service engineer when replacing the
battery.

Pb
CONTAINS SEALED LEAD BATTERY.
BATTERY MUST BE RECYCLED.

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

For R1 SUPER U
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any
interference, received including interference that may cause undesired operation.
This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class A limits for radio noise emissions from digital
apparatus a set out in the Radio Interference Regulations of the Canadian Department of
Communications.

vi

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

II. DESCRIPTION OF SIGNAL WORDS


Description of Signal Words
Signal words indicate the levels of potential danger.
Signal word contains the following three levels of danger, which are used properly according to the
probability and seriousness of damage to be caused by the danger.
Danger:

Indicates an urgent situation that will likely result in death or serious injury should the
problem not be corrected.
Warning: Indicates a dangerous situation that is likely to result in death or serious injury should the
problem not be corrected.
Caution: Indicates a dangerous situation that may result in medium-scale damage or slight injury
should the problem not be corrected. It is also used when only property damage is
anticipated.
Probability of damage

Injury
(and physical
damage)

Damage is caused.
(High probability)

Damage may be cause.


(Low probability)

Death or serious
injury (Damage
is serious.)

Danger

Warning

Medium or slight
injury (Damage
is slight.)

Warning or
Caution

Caution

Caution

Physical damage only

Serious injury above refers to loss of eyesight, wounds, burns (low and high temperature),
electronic shock, bone fracture, or poisoning, which cause aftereffects or require medical
treatment as an outpatient or long hospitalization. Medium or slight injury refers to wounds
burns and electric shock which do not require medical treatment as an outpatient or long
hospitalization. Physical damage refers to any damage caused to houses or household
items, or injury to domestic livestocks or pets.

Description of warning and caution in the manual


(1) Warning is described in Chapter VI, LIST OF WARNING AND CAUTION LABELS AND WHERE
TO ATTACH.
(2) Caution is described in Chapter VI, LIST OF WARNING AND CAUTION LABELS AND WHERE
TO ATTACH. or described by the following method.

CAUTION

vii

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

II. ERLUTERUNG DER SIGNALWRTER


ERLUTERUNG DER SIGNALWRTER
Ein Signalwort weist auf den bei diesem Produkt vorherrschenden Gefahrengrad hin.
Die Signalbegriffe umfassen drei Gefahrenstufen, die sich durch den Grad der Wahrsheinlichkeit
und des mglichen Schadens unterschieden.
GEFAHR :

Weist auf eine extrem gefhrliche Situation hin, die zu schweren oder tdlichen
Verletzungen fhern kann, wenn die Problemursache nicht beseitigt wird.
WARNUG : Zeigt eine gefhrliche Situation an, die zu schweren oder tdlichen Verletzungen
fhren kann, wenn die Problemusache nicht beseitigt wird.
VORSICHT : Zeight eine gefhrliche Situation an, die zu leichten Verletzungen oder migen
Schden fhren kann, wenn die Problemursache nicht beseitigt wird. Dieser
Hinweis ercheint auch dann, wenn ausschlielich Sachschden zu befrchten
sind.
Wahrscheinlichkeit der Beschdigung
Beschdigung mit
Sicherheit anzunehmen
(hohe Wahrscheinlichkeit)

Beschdigung ist
anzunehmen (niedrige
Wahrscheinlichkeit)

GEFAHR

WARNUNG

WARNUNG oder
VORSICHT

VORSICHT

Schwere oder tdliche


Verletzungen (starke
Beschdigung der Anlage).

Verletzungsgefahr
(und Beschdigung
Leichte oder mittelschwere
der Anlage)
Verletzungen (leichte
Beschdigung der Anlage).

VORSICHT

Nur Beschdigung der Anlage

Die Bezeichnung schwere Verletzungen umfat Verlust des Augenlichts, uere


Verwundendungen, Verbrennungen (hohe oder niedrige Temperaturen), Elektroschock,
Knochenbrche und Vergiftungen, soweit sie schdliche Wirkungen hinterlassen oder
medizinische Behandlung (ambulant) oder Krankenhausaufenthalt nach sich ziehen.
Zu leichteren Verletzungen zhlen Verbrennungen und Elektroschock, soweit sie keine
schdlichen Wirkungen hinterlassen bzw. keine ambulante medizinische Behandlung oder
Krankenhausaufenthalt nach sich ziehen. Unter den Begriff Sachschden fallen Schden
an einem Gebude oder an Haushaltsgegenstnden sowie Verletzungen von Haustieren.

viii

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

III. DESCRIPTION OF WARNING AND CAUTION LABELS


Description of Warning and Caution Labels
Regarding system and tablets or processing solution (concentrate solution and solution used),
labels and marks are used to explain precautions. Before operating this system, fully understand
the meanings of these labels and marks to perform safe operation.

Example of the Warning Label

1 Signal word

3 Description of
signal word

2 Symbol marks
of signal word

1 Warning and Caution Labels

Meaning

Display method
WARNING

Incorrect operation may cause death or serious injury.

CAUTION

Incorrect operation may cause slight or minor injury, or physical


damage.

2 Symbol Mark
Symbol Mark

Meaning
Indicates Prohibition

Indicates Warning or Caution

Indicates Mandatory action

ix

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

3 Example of Using Symbol Marks


Symbol marks used mainly for tablets or processing solution (concentrate solution and solution used).
Symbol Mark

Meaning

Caution (Warning) Mark:


Harmful (poisonous) or irritating to the human body.

Caution (Warning) Mark:


There is risk of skin corrosion.

Mandatory action Mark:


Wear protective goggles when handling.

Mandatory action Mark:


Wear protective gloves when handling.

Caution (Warning) Mark:


This mark calls attention to operation precautions. Carefully read and
understand the text (description) on the label before performing
operation.

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

Symbol marks used mainly for equipment.


Symbol Mark

Meaning
Caution (Warning) Mark:
This mark calls attention to operation precautions. Carefully read and
understand the text (description) on the label before performing
operation.

Caution Mark:
Risk of electric shock due to high voltage.

Caution Mark:
Risk of serious burn due to very hot section.

Prohibition Mark:
Do not insert your hands, since you may be cut.

xi

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

III. BESCHREIBUNG VON WARNUNG- UND VORSICHT-ETIKETTEN


BESCHREIBUNG VON WARNUNG- UND VORSICHT-ETIKETTEN

Zur Sicherheit der Ausrstung und der Tabletten oder der Entwicklungslsung
(Konzentrationslsung und Lsung verwendet) dienen verschiedentliche Etiketten und Symbole.
Bitte machen Sie sich vor der Inbetriebnahme grndlich mit der Bedeutung dieser Etiketten und
Symbole vertraut.
Beispiel des warnenden Aufklebers

1 Signalbegriff

3 Erklrung des
Signalbegriffs

2 Symbole zum
Signalbegriff

1 Warnung- und Vorsich-Etiketten

Bedeutung

Darstellung

WARNUNG Falsche Handhabung verursacht schwere oder tdliche Verletzungen.

VORSICHT

Falsche Handhabung verursacht verursacht leichte Verletzungen


oder Sachschden.

2 Symbol Mark
Symbol

Bedeutung
Bedeute Verboten

Bedeutet Warnung oder Vorsicht

Bedeute Unbedingte Vorschrift

xii

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

3 Beispiele fr Symbole
Symbole sind hauptschlich fr Tabletten oder Entwicklungslsung (Konzentrationslsung und Lsung
verwendet) angebracht.
Symbol

Bedeutung

Symbole fr Vorsicht (Warnung):


Ist fr Menschen schdlich (giftig) oder hat Reizwirkung.

Symbol fr Vorsicht (Warnung):


Es besteht die Gefahr tzender Hautreizung.

Symbol fr unbedingte Vorschrift:


Bei der Handhabung unbedingt Schutzbrille tragen.

Symbol fr unbedingte Vorschrift:


Bei der handhabung unbedingt Schutzhandschue tragen.

Symbol fr Vorsicht (Warnung):


Dieses Symbol weist auf wichtige Vorsichtsmaregeln hin.
Bitte lesen Sie den Etikettentext (Beschreibung) genau durch, bevor
Sie den nchsten Arbeitsschritt ausfhren.

xiii

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

Hauptschlich auf Ausrstungsteilen angebrachte Symbole.


Symbol

Bedeutung
Symbol fr Vorsicht (Warnung):
Dieses Symbol weist auf wichtige Vorsichtsmaregeln hin.
Bitte lesen Sie den Etikettentext (Beschreibung) genau durch, bevor
Sie den nchsten Arbeitsschritt ausfhren.

Symbol fr Vorsicht:
Es besteht Hochspannung und damit Elektroschockgefahr.

Symbol fr Vorsicht:
Es besteht die Gefahr von Verbrennungen an erhitzten Teilen.

Symbol fr Verbot:
Nicht mit der Hand hineignreifen; es besteht Schnittverletzungsgefahr.

xiv

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

IV. LIST OF WARNING AND CAUTION LABELS AND WHERE TO ATTACH


WARNING
*1 E: Except NEMKO Standard and UL Standard
C: NEMKO Standard
U: UL Standard
Parts No.

Operation

Label

Handling overflow Do not drink this liquid.

Label
Location*1

W-1

Do not remove this label from this plastic tank.

#367050021A
(For User)

#359450005A
(For User)

WARNING/WARNUNG

Do not drink this liquid.


Do not remove this label from this plastic tank.
NIEMALS diese Flssigkeit trinken!
KEINESFALLS diesen Aufkleber vom
Kunststoffbehlter entfernen.

#359454004A
(For User)

xv

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

Parts No.

Operation
Replacing the
cutter blade

Label
Cutter blade is located below.
Turn OFF the power switch before touching this area, and before
changing or removing the blade or jammed paper.

W-2

E
C
U

#271050001A
(For Engineer)

Handling
chemicals or
overflow solution

When mixing or handling chemicals or overflow solutions, wear


safety goggles and rubber gloves. If chemicals get in your eyes or
on your skin, rinse immediately with lots of water.

W-3

#367050022A
(For User)

#357050101A
(For User)

Label
Location*1

WARNING / WARNUNG

When mixing or handling chemicals


or overflow solutions, wear safety goggles and
rubber gloves. If chemicals get in your eyes or
on your skin, rinse immediately with lots of
water.
Bei der Handhabung von Chemikalien oder
Lsungen unbedingt eine Schutzbrille und
Gummihandschuhe tragen!
Bei Augen-oder Hautkontakt die Chemikalien
sofort mit reichlich Wasser absplen.

#357054101A
(For User)

WARINING / ADVERTENCIA

When mixing or handling chemicals


or overflow solutions, wear safety goggles and
rubber gloves. If chemicals get in your eyes or
on your skin, rinse immediately with lots of
water.
Cuando mazcle manipule productos
qumicos soluciones de sobrellenado, utilice
gafas protectoras y guantes de caucho. Si
estos productos qumicos netran en sus ojos
tocan su piel, lvelos inmediatamente con
abundante cantidad de agua.

xvi

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

Parts No.

Operation
Handling
ECOJET

Label
When you have to directly handle ECOJET or processing solutions,
or when you have to touch ECOJET powder or processing
solutions to disassemble or clean the ECOJET shooter or module
drum, wear gloves and protective goggles for safety. If chemicals
contact eyes or skin, wash off with water for 15 minutes.
Get medical attention. Chemicals may cause skin irritation.

Label
Location*1

W-4

#2780850006A
(For User)

#253450027A
(For User)

#253450029A
(For User)

xvii

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

Parts No.

Operation
Replacing the
cartridge

#359056006A
(For User)

Label
Do not eat ECOJET tablets or drink solutions. In case tablets or
chemicals are swallowed, rinse mouth with water, drink one or two
cups (180ml or more) of water, and get medical attention immediately.

WARNING /

Label
Location*1

W-5

Do not eat ECOJET tablets or


drink solutions. In case tablets
or chemicals are swallowed,
rinse mouth with water, drink
one or two cups of water, and
get medical attention
immediately.

1
2

#359450004A
(For User)

WARNING / WARNUNG
Do not eat ECOJET tablets or drink
solutions. In case tablets or
chemicals are swallowed, rinse
mouth with water, drink one or two
cups of water, and get medical
attention immediately.
ECOJET-Tabletten und -Lsungen
drfen auf keinen Fall verschluckt
werden. Falls dennoch einmal
Tabletten oder Chemikalien
verschluckt werden, den Mund mit
Wasser aussplen, ein oder zwei
Glas Wasser trinken und sofort
einen Arzt aufsuchen.

#3594540003A
(For User)

WARNING / ADVERTENCIA
Do not eat ECOJET tablets or drink
solutions. In case tablets or
chemicals are swallowed, rinse
mouth with water, drink one or two
cups of water, and get medical
attention immediately.
No ingerir nunca tabletas ECOJET
ni soluciones. En caso de ingerirse
accidentalmente, enjuaguar la boca
con gaua, beber uno o dos vasos
de agua y acudir al mdico
inmediatamente.

xviii

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

Parts No.

Label

Label
Location*1

Always wear safety gloves and protective glasses when handling


ECOJET tablet and solution directly. If ECOJET tablet or solution
spilled on the skin or get into eyes, wash it off with running water for
more than 15 minutes. If swallowed, rinse the mouth with water, drink
one or two cups of water, and get medical treatment immediately.

W-6

Operation
Replacing the
cartridge or
handling
processing
solution

#278050004A
(For User)

#253450018A
(For User)

WARNING / WARNUNG

Always wear safety gloves and protective glasses when handling


ECOJET tablet and solution directly. If ECOJET tablet or solution s
pilled on the skin or get into eyes, wash it off with running
water for more than 15 minutes. If swallowed, rinse the mouth with
water, drink one or two cups of water, and get medical treatment
immediately.
Grundstzlich Schutzhandschuhe und Schutzbrille tragen, wenn mit
ECOJET-Tabletten und -Lsung hantiert wird. Falls ECOJET-Tabletten
oder -Lsung auf die Haut oder in die Augen gert, sofort mindestens
15 Minuten lang unter flieendem Wasser absplen. Falls diese
Tabletten oder Lsung verschluckt wurde, den Mund mit Wasser
aussplen, ein oder zwei Glas Wasser trinken und sofort einen Arzt
rufen.

#253450019A
(For User)

WARNING / ADVERTENCIA
Always wear safety gloves and protective glasses when handling
ECOJET tablet and solution directly. If ECOJET tablet or solution s
pilled on the skin or get into eyes, wash it off with running
water for more than 15 minutes. If swallowed, rinse the mouth with
water, drink one or two cups of water, and get medical treatment
immediately.

Siempre usar guantes de seguridad y gafas protoctoras para


manipular directamente soluciones o tabletas ECOJET. Si la
solucin o la tableta ECOJET llegara a entrar en contacto con
su piel o sus ojos, lavar con abundante cantidad de agua durante 15
minutos. De ingerirse, enjuagar la boca con agua, beber uno o dos
vasos de agua, y acudir inmediatamente al mdico.

xix

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

CAUTION
*1 E: Except NEMKO Standard and UL Standard
C: NEMKO Standard
U: UL Standard

Parts No.

Operation
Carrying and
setting the paper
supply magazine

Label
You may drop the paper magazine on your feet or injure your fingers at installation, if
you fail to hold the magazine with one hand on the handle and the other on the part
marked in green.

Label
Location*1

C-1

E
C
U

#366052007A
(For User)

Interlock switch

Do not place or insert any object into this space.


Do not disable this safety device.

#271050002A
(For Engineer)

Do not place or
insert any object
into this space.
Do not disable
this safety device.

C-2

E
C
U

Handling top
cover
#271050003A
(For User)

C-3

CAUTION / / PRECAICION /
VORSICHT / ATTENTION / CAUTELA

xx

E
C
U

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

Parts No.

Operation
Removing dryer
rack

Label
The dryer rack cover is HOT. Before touching cover or removing
dryer rack unit, turn the power switch OFF and wait 10 minutes to let
the rack cover and rack cool.

Label
Location*1

C-4

#359056008A
(For Engineer)

#359450008A
(For Engineer)

CAUTION / VORSICHT

Dryer rack cover is HOT. Before touching


cover or removing dryer rack unit, turn the
machine's power OFF and wait 10 minutes to
let the rack cover and rack cool.
HEISSE Trockner-Rack-Abdeckung!
Vor Berhren der Abdeckung oder Entfernen
des Trockners den Strom ausschalten und 10
Minuten abkhlen lassen.

#359454007A
(For Engineer)

CAUTION / PRECAUCION

Dryer rack cover is HOT. Before touching


cover or removing dryer rack unit, turn the
machine's power OFF and wait 10 minutes to
let the rack cover and rack cool.
La cubierta de la parrilla de secado est
CALIENTE. Antes de tocar la cubierta de
desmontar la parrilla de secado, desconecte
la mquina y espere 10 minutos para que se
enfren la cubierta y la parrilla.

Removing dryer
rack

Dryer rack unit is heavy. Hold it by the bars marked with green labels
when removing or replacing the unit.

#359056009A
(For Engineer)

#359450006A
(For Engineer)

C-5

CAUTION / VORSICHT

Dryer rack unit is heavy. Hold it by the


bars marked with green labels when
removing or replacing the unit.
CAUTION
Weight : 15Kg
VORSICHT
Gewicht : 15Kg

#359454005A
(For Engineer)

Schwere Trockner-Rack-Einheit!
Beim Ein-/Ausbau der Einheit nur an
die Stange mit dem grnen Aufkleber
fassen.

CAUTION / PRECAUCION

Dryer rack unit is heavy. Hold it by the


bars marked with green labels when
removing or replacing the unit.
CAUTION
Weight : 15Kg
PRECAUCION
Peso : 15Kg

xxi

La unidad de la parrilla de secado es


pesada. Levntela por las barras
marcadas con las etiquetas verdes
para sacar volver a instalar la unidad.

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

Parts No.

Removing prints

#253650003A
(For User)

Label

Label
Location*1

Print sorting rods move at high speed when prints are delivered from
the printer. Keep your hands away from these rods when printer is
operation.

C-6

Operation

CAUTION /
Print sorting rods move at high speed
when prints are delivered from the
printer. Keep your hands away from
these rods when printer is operation.

#253450003B
(For User)

CAUTION / VORSICHT
CAUTION
Print sorting rods move at high speed
when prints are delivered from the
printer. Keep your hands away from
these rods when printer is operation.

VORSICHT
Bei der Bildausgabe bewegt sich die
Sortiereinrichtung mit hoher
Geschwindigkeit. Daher whrend des
Betriebes keinesfalls die Sortierstangen berhren!

#253450014B
(For User)

CAUTION / PRECAUCION
CAUTION
Print sorting rods move at high speed when prints
are delivered from the printer. Keep your hands
away from these rods when printer is operation.
PRECAUCION
Los rodillos de clasificacin de las fotografas van
girando a gran velocidad cuando las fotos salen de
la impresora. Mantenga las manos fuera del
alcance de estos rodillos cuando la impresora est
funcionando.

xxii

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

Parts No.

Operation
Paper jam

Label
Do not place or insert any object into this space.
Do not disable this safety device.

Label
Location*1

C-7

#364057003A
(For Engineer)

#362452002A
(For Engineer)

CAUTION
Do not place or
insert any object into
this space.
Do not disable this
safety device.

VORSICHT
Niemals den
Trschalter
berbrcken!
Keine Teile in diesem
Bereich einsetzen.

#359454025A
(For Engineer)

CAUTION
Do not place or
insert any object into this
space.
Do not disable this safety
device.

PECAUCION
No coloque introduzca
ningn objeto en este
espacio.
No desactive el
dispositivo de seguridad.

xxiii

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

Parts No.

#359056010A
(For Engineer)

Operation
Replacing the
fuse

Label
High voltage! Turn power off before replacing fuses.

CAUTION /

Label
Location*1

C-8
E

High voltage! Turn power off before


replacing fuses.

OFF

#359450009A
(For Engineer)

CAUTION / VORSICHT
High voltage! Turn power off
before replacing fuses.
Hochspannung! Vor dem
Auswechseln der Sicherungen
den Netzstrom abschalten.

#359454008A
(For Engineer)

CAUTION / PRECAUCION
High voltage! Turn power off before
replacing fuses.
Alta tensin! Desconectar el
interruptor antes de
reemplazar los fusibles.

Handling power
switch

Turn OFF the power switch before touching this area.

#367050020A
(For Engineer)

#359450011A
(For Engineer)

C-9

CAUTION / VORSICHT

Turn OFF the power switch before


touching this area.
Vor Beruhren dieses Bereichs ist der
Netzschalter auszuschalten.

#359454009A
(For Engineer)

CAUTION/PRECAUCION

Turn OFF the power switch before


touching this area.
Desconecte el interrupor de
alimentacin antes de tocar esta rea.

xxiv

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

Parts No.

Opening the
external cover
#38505008A
(For Engineer)

Label

Label
Location*1

Do not open the external cover. (Only service engineers are permitted
to open the external cover) When a service engineer opens the
external cover, must turn off the power switch before starting
maintenance.

C-10

Operation

xxv

E
C
U

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

Parts No.

Operation
Handling drum
unit

Label
You may pinch your hand.
Do not put your hand into the drum unit.

Label
Location*1

C-11

#278050005A
(For User)

#253450023A
(For User)

#253450025A
(For User)

xxvi

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

Parts No.

Operation

Label

Handling the light When removing the light source, turn off the power, and wait 15
minutes before beginning removal procedures.
source unit
#270050004A
(For User)

CAUTION

Wh e n r e m o v i n g t h e
light source, turn
off the power,
and wait 15 minutes
before begining
removal procedures.

OFF15

xxvii

Label
Location*1

C-12

E
C
U

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

J Type
Printer/Processor
<Top surface of the body>

Film scanner
<Front surface of
the body>

W-4
W-5
C-7
C-6
C-5

C-4
C-3
W-4

C-12

W-5
C-11
Processor
<Side surface of the body>

Printer/Processor
<Front surface of the body>

C-6

C-10

C-2
W-2

W-6

C-1

C-9
C-8

Paper Magazine

Overflow Tank

W-1

C-1

xxviii

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

SQA Type

Film scanner
<Front surface of
the body>

Printer/Processor
<Top surface of the body>

C-7
C-6
C-5

C-4
C-3

C-12

W-3

Processor
<Side surface of the body>

Printer/Processor
<Front surface of the body>

C-6

C-10

C-2
W-2

W-3

C-1

C-9
C-8

Paper Magazine

Overflow Tank

W-1
W-3

C-1

xxix

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

1. LOCATION DIAGRAM OF CIRCUIT BOARD

INVERTER BOARD
(584076302A)

LCD-CPU BOARD
(2710H1030)

HEAD-BUF BOARD
(2710H1010)

PRINTER-CPU BOARD
(2710H1020)

HDC-PCI BOARD
(2710H1000)

PRINTER SECTION

LCD-CPU BOARD
(2710H1030)

PC
SECTION

HEAD-TRM BOARD
(2710H1220)

PFU-DRV BOARD
(2710H1230)
FLUORESCENT PRINT HEAD
POWER SUPPLY BOARD x 2
(271076903)

SUP1 - SUP5

PSA BOARD
(2710H1040)

SCANNER DRIVER BOARD


SDU-DRV BOARD
(56GA-9090-00)
(2710H1200)
EFU-DRV BOARD
(2710H1210)

Printer
<Side surface of the body>

Printer
<Front surface of the body>

SCANNER DRIVER BOARD


(56GA-9090-00)

SCANNER DRIVER BOARD


(56GA-9090-00)

AFC-CPU BOARD
(2700H1130)
LS-LED A
(2700H1100)

DC-TRM
(2700H1140)
LS-LED A
(2700H1100)
SUP2

SUP1
LS-LED B
(2700H1110)

LS-LED B
(2700H1110)

Film scanner
<Side surface of the body>

Film scanner
<Front surface of the body>

-1

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

2. IMPORTANT NOTICE WHEN YOU HANDLE BOARDS OR POWER SUPPLY UNITS


IMPORTANT:
Turn off all power sources.
When unplugging the power cord, make sure that the power has been
completely turned off, and remove the plug from the socket by pulling on the
plug connector section, not the power cable. (Use the same method for
plugging in the unit)
Before removing circuit boards, switches or sensors in the system, discharge
static electricity from your body by touching other metal part of the system.
When adjusting a board or a replacing a power supply unit, use a ceramic
screwdriver. Do not use a metal screwdriver.

-1

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

3. EXPLANATION OF CIRCUIT BOARD


Input Station
3-1. AFC-CPU Circuit Board (2700H1130)
1. What it does
Receives commands from the KIC-1 imaging unit, and controls the film carrier and imaging
illuminants.
2. External view and functions
(1) External view

(2) Dimensions.
155mm x 280mm x about 30mm (with six mounting holes).
(3) Functions
CPU: HD64F2339 (24.576MHz clock).
SRAM: 128KB.
I/O:
Analog input
Logical input
+5V output
+24V output
Serial communication (RS-232-C)

8 channels.
20 channels.
12 channels.
32 channels.
3 channels.

3. Power supply
(1) +5V 2A(max)
(2) +15V 0.4 A(max )
(3) +24V 4A(max)

-1

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

4. Connectors
Connector
AFCN1

Connector
AFCN2

Connector
AFCN3

Connector
AFCN4

Function

Pin No.

Power supply.

1. +5V
2. GND(+5V)
3. V
4. GND(V)
5. V
6. GND(V)

Function

Pin No.

Control of film carrier.


Input.
APS cartridge-related.
Output.
Cartridge motor.
Light lock door solenoid.

1, 2, 3: Drive cartridge light lock doorsolenoid.


5, 6, 9, 10: Drive cartridge motor.
13, 14, 19, 20: +5V
17, 18, 23, 24: GND.
11, 12: Spare (to detect carrier setting).
15: VEI.
16: CTS.
21: CLS.
22: LLDS.

Function

Pin No.

Film carrier signals.


Input.
Film sensor.
APS IX magnetic data line.
Carrier type/mask type.
Output.
Carrier LED.

1: +15V.
3, 5. +5V.
2, 4, 6, 26, 28, 30: GND.
7, 8: FHS.
9, 10, 11, 12: RDH**.
13: LED_DRV.
15, 16: SDK/SDA.
1723: AN0AN6.
25, 27, 29: FCS.
31, 32, 33: PMSOL.
14, 34: NC.

Function

Pin No.

Communication with image 1. RxD


capture unit.
2. TxD
3. FRESET
4. FBUSY
5. CLK
6. ENB
7. LCLK
8. GND

-2

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

Connector
AFCN5

Connector
AFCN6

Connector
AFCN8

Connector
AFCN10

Function

Pin No.

Front-mounted LEDs.
Control of power to flatbed
scanner outlet.

1,2. NC
3. +24V
4. FUN2
5,6. RUN LED
7,8. POWER LED
9,10. SW
11,12. Spare
13,14. AC DRIVE

Function

Pin No.

Driving speed change unit


control line.

1,3. +24V
2. CLT1
4. CLT2
5,6 NC
7. MCLK
8. R/LEFT
9. W23P/23P
10,11,12. V0,V1,V2
14. +5V
13,16. GND
15. CHS

Function
Imaging illuminant
control line.

Pin No.
18. Illuminant.
912. Illuminant.
1316. Illuminant.
1929. Illuminant.
7. MCLK
8. R/LEFT
9. 3P/23P
10,11,12. V0,V1,V2
33,35,37,39. +24V
34,36,38,40. FUN
30,31. ANALOG
17. LSS0
18. GND

Function
For CPU programs.

Pin No.
1. TxD
3. RxD
7. GND

-3

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

5. On-board switches
SW
SW1
[MODE]

Setting
Function:
Sets hardware modes.
DIP switch settings:
Bit No
ON/OFF

1
OFF

2
OFF

3
OFF

4
OFF

5
OFF

6
OFF

7
OFF

8
OFF

Setting details:
Bit No Setting
Bit 1
OFF
Bit 2
OFF
Bit 3
OFF
Bit 4
OFF
Bit 5
OFF
Bit 6
OFF
Bit 7
OFF
Bit 8

SW2
[RESET]

Details/function

ON

For factory use (to enable write to boot ROM).

OFF

Must be turned off all the time.

Function:
Pressing this switch resets CPU.

6. On-board test pins


TP
TP1
TP35,36,37,38,39
TP2
TP3
TP4
TP5
TP6

Silk

Terminal

[GND]

GND terminal.

[5V]
[24V]
[15V]
[3.3V]
[2.5V]

+5V check terminal.


+24V check terminal.
+15V check terminal.
+3.3V check terminal.
+2.5V check terminal.

-4

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

7. On-board LEDs
LED

Silk

LED1

[CNFG]

LED2

[BUSY]

LED3
LED4
LED6

[POWER]

LED7

[RUN]

LED8LED15
LED16

[B1]

LED17

[B2]

LED18

[B3]

LED19

[B4]

LED20

[B5]

LED21

[B6]

LED22

[G1]

LED23

[G2]

LED24

[G3]

LED25

[G4]

LED26

[R1]

LED27

[R2]

LED28

[IR1]

LED29

[IR2]

What it indicates
Status of initialization of FPGA.
Lit : Initialization is complete.
Status of operation of FPGA.
Lit : FPGA is operating (feeding film).
Setting of driving speed change unit.
Lit : Unit is set.
Status of imaging unit.
Lit : Unit is operating.
Lights when CPU starts operation.
Lit : Software is running.
Status of film.
Unlit : No film is loaded.
Lit : Film is loaded.
Blinking : Film is being fed.
Indicate modes.
B illuminant drive IC46 is open.
Lit : An error condition exists.
B illuminant drive IC46 temperature is beyond limit.
Lit : An error condition exists.
B illuminant drive IC47 is open.
Lit : An error condition exists.
B illuminant drive IC47 temperature is beyond limit.
Lit : An error condition exists.
B illuminant drive IC48 is open.
Lit : An error condition exists.
B illuminant drive IC48 temperature is beyond limit.
Lit : An error condition exists.
G illuminant drive IC9 is open.
Lit : An error condition exists.
G illuminant drive IC9 temperature is beyond limit.
Lit : An error condition exists.
G illuminant drive IC10 is open.
Lit : An error condition exists.
G illuminant drive IC10 temperature is beyond limit.
Lit : An error condition exists.
R illuminant drive IC11 is open.
Lit : An error condition exists.
R illuminant drive IC11 temperature is beyond limit.
Lit : An error condition exists.
IR illuminant drive IC12 is open.
Lit : An error condition exists.
IR illuminant drive IC12 temperature is beyond limit.
Lit : An error condition exists.

-5

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

8. On-board potentiometers
LED
VR1,VR2,VR3
VR4,VR5
VR6
VR7

Silk
[B1] [B2] [B3]
[1] [G2]
[R]
[IR]

Function
Adjust the blue LEDs.
Adjust the current through the green LEDs.
Adjusts the current through the red LEDs.
Adjusts the current through the IR LEDs.

Note: VR1~VR7 are factory-adjusted. Do not tamper with them in the field.

-6

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

3-2. DC-TRM board (2700H1140)


1. What it does
Supply DC power to Image capturing unit, AFC-CPU board, transport motors and light source of
DS-1000.
2. External view and functions
(1) External view

(2) Dimensions
90 x 155 x around 30 mm (with four mounting holes)
3. Supplied power
(1) +5V 2A(max )
(2) +15V 0.4 A(max )
(3) +24V 4A(max)

-7

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

4. Connectors
Connector
FCN1

Function
Power (Input)

Connector
FCN2

Power supply to image


capturing unit

Pin No..

Function
Power supply to transport
motor

Pin No..
1. 5V
2. GND(+5V)
3,4. +24V.
5,6. PGND(+24V)

Function

Pin No.

Function

Pin No.

Not used

Connector
FCN6

1. +15V
4. AGND(+15V)
2. 5V
5. GND(+5V)
3. +24V.
6. PGND(+24V)

Power supply to AFC-CPU 1. +15V


board
5. AGND(+15V)
2. 5V
6. GND(+5V)
3,4. +24V.
7,8. PGND(+24V)

Connector
FCN5

Pin No.

Function

Connector
FCN4

1. +15V
7. AGND(+15V)
2, 3. 5V
8,9. GND(+5V)
4, 5,6 +24V.
10.,11,12. PGND(+24V)

Function

Connector
FCN

Pin No.

Not used

-8

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

5. On-board test pins


TP
TP1
TP2
TP3
TP4
TP5
TP6TP14
TP7
TP8
TP9
TP10
TP11
TP12
TP13
TP15
TP16
TP17
TP18

Silk

Terminal

[+15V]
[AGND]
[+5V]
[GND]
[+24V]
[PG]
[G1]
[G2]
[R]
[IR1]
[IR2]
[B1]
[B2]
[24V1]
[24V2]
[24V3]

+15V check terminal


AGND
+5V check terminal
GND
+24V check terminal
PG
G1 LED light source current adjustment terminal
G2 LED light source current adjustment terminal
R LED light source current adjustment terminal
IR1 light source current adjustment terminal
IR2 light source current adjustment terminal
B1 light source current adjustment terminal
B2 LED light source current adjustment terminal
Image capturing unit power supply check terminal
AFC-CPU board power supply check terminal
scanner driver board power supply check terminal
+24V check terminal

Silk
[G1] [G2]
[R]
[B1] [B2]

Function
Green LED light source current adjustment terminal
Red LED light source current adjustment terminal
Blue LED light source current adjustment terminal

6. On-board VRs
LED
VR1,VR2
VR3
VR4,VR5

Note: VR1 through VR5 are set in factory. Do not touch VR in field.

-9

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

3-3. SCANNER DRIVING board (56GA-9090-00)


1. What it does
Drive and control 3 phase stepping motor
2. External view and functions
(1) External view

(2) Dimensions
94 x 17 x around 45 mm (with four mounting holes)
3. Supplied power
(1) +5V 1A(max )
(2) +24V 4A(max)

-10

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

4. Connectors
Connector
CN600

Function

Pin No..

Power supply (input)

Connector
CN610

1. 5V
2. GND
34. 24V
56. PG

Function

Pin No.

Motor control signal

1. MCLK
2. MA/*LEFT
3. W23P/*23P
4. V0
5. V1
6. V2
715. not used
Note: CN621, CN622 and CN623 are not used.

5. On-board test pins


TP
TP1
TP2
TP3
TP4

Silk
[SGND]
[5V]
[PGND]
[24V]

Terminal
SGND
+5V check terminal
PGND
+24V check terminal
Note: There are any real test pins on board.

-11

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

3-4. LS-LED-A board (2700H1100)


1. What it does
Light source for image capturing unit (Blue light)
2. External view and functions
External view

(2) Dimensions
118 x 50 x around 15 mm (with four mounting holes)
(3) Functions
Light source for image capturing unit (Blue light)

3. Connectors
Connector
LSCN1

Function

Pin No.

LED light source for image 1. V_B1


capturing unit
2. B-CH11
3. B-CH10
4. B-CH9
5. B-CH8
6. B-CH7
7. B-CH6
8. B-CH5
9. B-CH4
10. B-CH3
11. B-CH2
12. B-CH1
13. V_B2
14. +5V
15. LS-TH
16. N.C

-12

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

3-5. LS-LED-B board (27001110)


1. What it does
Light source for image capturing unit (G, R and IR light)
2. External view and functions
External view

(2) Dimensions
118 x 50 x around 15 mm (with four mounting holes)
(3) Functions
Light source for image capturing unit (Green)
Light source for image capturing unit (Red)
Light source for image capturing unit (IR)

-13

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

3. Connectors
Connector
LSCN2

Function

Pin No.

LED light source for image 1. V_G1


capturing unit
2. G-CH1
3. G-CH2
4. G-CH3
5. G-CH4
6. G-CH5
7. G-CH6
8. G-CH7
9. G-CH8
10. V_G2
11. V_R1
12. R-CH1
13. R-CH2
14. R-CH3
15. R-CH4
16. V_R2
17. V_IR1
18. IR-CH1
19. IR-CH2
20. IR-CH3
21. IR-CH4
22. V_IR2
23. through_out
24. through out
25. N.C
26. N.C

-14

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

3-6. 135LED board (27001340)


1. What it does
Illuminate LED of sensor.
Used in 135 AFC.
2. External view and functions
External view

(2) Dimensions
162 x 85 and around 15 mm (with three mounting holes)
There is a notch.
(3) Functions
For film sensor LED
Relay full/panoramic mask solenoid cable

-15

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

3. Connectors
Connector

Function

CCN4

Connector
CCN8

Pin No.
1. +5V
2. +5V
3. *LED_DRV
4. *LED_DRV
5. PMSOL+
6. PMSOL+
7. PMSOL_C
8. PMSOL_C
9. PMSOL10. PMSOL-

Function

Pin No.
1. PMSOL+
2. PMSOL_C
3. PMSOL-

-16

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

3-7. SENS-A board (2700H1320)


1. What it does
Film detection board.
Sensor board which has photo diode.
2. External view and functions
External view

(2) Dimensions
27.5 x 6 x around 10 mm (with a mounting hole)
(3) Functions
135AFC: a) Inlet film insertion detection x 1 CH, b) Film perforation detection x 2 CH
240AFC: a) Inlet film insertion detection x 1 CH, b) Film perforation detection x 2 CH
3. Connectors
Connector
CCN1

Function
Photo diode

Pin No.
1. PD-A
2. PD-K

-17

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

3-8. SENS-B board (2700H1330)


1. What it does
Film latent image barcode detection board.
Sensor board which has photo diode.
2. External view and functions
External view

(2) Dimensions
28 x 10 x around 10 mm (with a mounting hole)
(3) Functions
135AFC: Code detection x 2 CH
240AFC: Code detection x 2 CH
3. Connectors
Connector
CCN2

Function
Photo diode

Pin No..
1. PD2. PD3. CATHODE

-18

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

3-9. 240LED board (2700H1380)


1. What it does
Illuminate LED of sensor.
Used in 240 AFC.
2. External view and functions
External view

(2) Dimensions
140 x 88 x around 15 mm (with three mounting holes)
with a notch
(3) Functions
For film sensor light source LED

3. Connector
Connector
CCN5

Function

Pin No.
1. +5V
2. +5V
3. *LED-DRV
4. *LED-DRV
5. PMSOL+
6. PMSOL+
7. PMSOL_C
8. PMSOL_C
9. PMSOL10. PMSOL-

-19

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

3-10. MAG-AMP board (2700H1390)


1. What it does
For 240AFC
Amp. board for APS film Magnetic data
2. External view and functions
External view

(2) Dimensions
117 x 70 x around 23mm (with three mounting holes)
with a notch
(3) Functions
APS film magnetic head output: 4 CH

-20

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

3. Connectors
Connector

Function

MACN1

Connector

1. +12V
2. GND
3. -12V
4. RDH11
5. RDH12
6. RDH21
7. RDH22
Function

MACN2

Connector

Function

MACN5

Pin No.
1. GND
2. TRACK21+
3. TRACK214. GND
5. TRACK22+
6. TRACK227. GND
8. GND

Function

MACN4

Connector

Pin No.
1. GND
2. GND
3. TRACK124. TRACK12+
5. GND
6. TRACK117. TRACK11+
8. GND

MACN3

Connector

Pin No.

Pin No.
1. T1
2. GND
3. T2
4. GND

Function

Pin No.
1. T3
2. GND
3. T4
4. GND

-21

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

3-11. PD-AMP board (2700H1300)


1. What it does
Amp. board for film sensors (inlet detection, latent image bar cord detection and perforation
detection)
For both 135AFC and 240AFC
2. External view and functions
(1) External view

(2) Dimensions
150 x 50 x around 10 mm (with two mounting holes)
with a notch
(3) Functions
Film sensor amp.: 7 CH
Carrier ID setting: 2 CH
Relay of cable for 135LED and 240LED board (Sensor LED drive, full/panoramic solenoid)
Power supply and cable relay for 240AFC MAG AMP board

-22

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

3. Connectors
Connector

Function

PDCN1

Connector
PDCN2

Pin No.
1. PMSOL_C
2. PMSOL3. PMSOL+
4. FCS1
5. GNDFCS0
6. FCS0
7. NHS
8. SENSOR6
9. SENSOR5
10. SENSOR4
11. SENSOR3
12. SENSOR2
13. SENSOR1
14. SENSOR0
15. SDA
16. SCK
17. NC
18. LEDDRV
19. M_D22
20. M_D12
21. M_D21
22. M_D11
23. FHS1
24. FHS0
25. GND
26. +5V
27. GND
28. +5V
29. GND
30. +15V

Function

Pin No.
1. +5V
2. +5V
3. LEDDRV
4. LEDDRV
5. PMSOL+
6. PMSOL+
7. PMSOL_C
8. PMSOL_C
9. PMSOL10. PMSOL-

-23

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

Connector

Function

PDCN3

Connector

1. IN
2. GND
3. ROCS
4. RICS
5. GND
6. UPRS
7. N.C
8. GND
9. LOCS
10. LICS
11. GND
12. GND
Function

PDCN4

Connector

Connector

Pin No.
1. LPRS
2. N.C
3. GND

Function

PDCN5

PDCN6

Pin No.

Pin No.
1. +5V
2. NHS
3. GND
4. N.C

Function

Pin No.
1. +12V
2. GND
3. -12V
4. M_D11
5. M_D12
6. M_D21
7. M_D22

-24

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

4. On-board switches
SW
SW1
[MODE]

Setting
Function
Set carrier ID.
In case of multiple film carrier set different ID to each carrier.
Dip SW setting
Bit No
ON/OFF

1
OFF

2
OFF

Setting donditoin
Bit No
Bit 1
Bit 2

Setting 1
OFF
OFF

Setting 2
ON
OFF

Setting 3
OFF
ON

Setting 4
ON
ON

4 pattern selection. Default: Setting 1

5. On-board test pins


TP
TP1
TP2
TP3
TP4
TP5
TP6
TP7
TP8
TP9
TP10
TP11
TP12
TP13
TP14
TP15
TP16
TP17
TP18
TP19
TP20

Silk
[+5V]
[-15V]
[GND]
[-5V]
[-12V]
[IN]
[ROCS]
[RICS]
[UPRS]
[LOC]
[LIC]
[LPR]

[+12V]

Terminal
+5V check terminal
-15V check terminal
GND termin
-5V check terminal
-12V check terminal
IN sensor check terminal
ROCS sensor check terminal
RICS sensor check terminal
UPRS sensor check terminal
LOC sensor check terminal
LIC sensor check terminal
LPR sensor check terminal
SENSOR0 output voltage terminal
SENSOR1 output voltage terminal
SENSOR2 output voltage terminal
SENSOR3 output voltage terminal
SENSOR4 output voltage terminal
SENSOR5 output voltage terminal
SENSOR6 output voltage terminal
+12V check terminal

-25

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

3-12. FMS board (2700H1370)


1. What it does
Sensor board to detect Universal film carrier mask
2. External view and functions
External view

(2) Dimensions
36 x 27 x around 10 mm (with two mounting holes)
with a notch
(3) Functions
Mask detection: 3 CH
Carrier setting: 2 CH

3. Connector
Connector
CCN7

Function
Photo interrupter signal

Pin No.
1. +5V
2. GND
3. MS2
4. MS1
5. MS0
6. AN0
7. AN1
8. GND

-26

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

4. On-board switches
SW
SW1
[MODE]

Setting
Function
Select universal carrier ID.
If there are number of UFC, change settings for each carrier.
Default dip switch setting
Bit No
ON/OFF

1
OFF

2
OFF

Setting
Bit No
Bit 1
Bit 2

Setting 1
OFF
OFF

Setting 2
ON
OFF

Setting 3
OFF
ON

Setting 4
ON
ON

4 selections.
Default: 1

-27

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

3-13. LED-LAMP board (2700H1360)


1. What it does
For universal carrier LED control
2. External view and functions
External view

(2) Dimensions
83 x 10 x around 10 mm (with two mounting holes)
(3) Functions
LED light: 1 CH

3. Connector
Connector
CCN6

Function
LED light control

Pin No..
1. +15V
2. LEDDRV

-28

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

Printer
3-14. HDC-PCI Circuit Board (2710H1000)
1. What it does
This forms part of the exposure engine as the PCI circuit board mounted in the PCI slot of the
printer PC. It stores PC-processed two-dimensional image data temporarily, and sends the data to
the HEAD-BUFF circuit board at the optimal times for the head positions and mounting as
described further on in this paper.
2. External view and functions
(1) External view.

(2) Dimensions.
106.68mm x 220mm x about 12mm (PCI circuit board).
(3) Functions.
FPGA: EP20K200EFC484-1X (Altera).
FPGA: EPF10K50SQC240-1 (Altera).
SDRAM: HY57V281620AT-P (Hyundai)6.
EEPROM: AT93C46-10SC-2.7 (Atmel).
3. Power supplies
(1) +5V
(2) +3.3V

-29

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

4. Connectors
4-1.HEAD-BUFF Circuit Boardinterface specifications (MCN1)
1) Connector catalog No.: Half-pitch 68-pin connector FCN-235D068-G/C (Fujitsu).
2) Signal level: Differential (+/-) and 3.3V CMOS level.
3) Pin assignment: See below.
Function
Data bus D0 (LSB) +
Data bus D1 +
Data bus D2 +
Data bus D3 +
Data bus D4 +
Data bus D5 +
Data bus D6 +
Data bus D7 +
Data bus D8 +
Data bus D9 +
Data bus D10 +
Data bus D11 +
Data bus D12 +
Data bus D13 +
Data bus D14 +
Data bus D15 +
Ground
Dot clock 4.17MHz +
Pixel data clock 25MHz +
Interrupt request +
Ready +
Data strobe +
Address strobe +
Read/write select +
Access mode(print/reg.) +
Ground
Ground
Ground
Ground (BL1_SYNC return)
Ground (GL1_SYNC return)
Ground (RL1_SYNC return)
Ground (BL2_SYNC return)
Ground (GL2_SYNC return)
Ground (RL2_SYNC return)

Label
+RH_D[0]
+RH_D[1]
+RH_D[2]
+RH_D[3]
+RH_D[4]
+RH_D[5]
+RH_D[6]
+RH_D[7]
+RH_D[8]
+RH_D[9]
+RH_D[10]
+RH_D[11]
+RH_D[12]
+RH_D[13]
+RH_D[14]
+RH_D[15]
GND
+RH_DOTS_CLK
+RH_PCLK
+RH_INT_REQ
+RH_RDY
+RH_DSTB
+RH_ASTB
+RH_RW
+RH_BUS_MODE
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34

Pin
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68

-30

Label
-RH_D[0]
-RH_D[1]
-RH_D[2]
-RH_D[3]
-RH_D[4]
-RH_D[5]
-RH_D[6]
-RH_D[7]
-RH_D[8]
-RH_D[9]
-RH_D[10]
-RH_D[11]
-RH_D[12]
-RH_D[13]
-RH_D[14]
RH_D[15]
GND
-RH_DOTS_CLK
-RH_PCLK
-RH_INT_REQ
-RH_RDY
-RH_DSTB
-RH_ASTB
-RH_RW
-RH_BUS_MODE
RH_INT_RQ2
SPEAR IN2
Ready
BL1_SYNC
GL1_SYNC
RL1_SYNC
BL2_SYNC
GL2_SYNC
RL2_SYNC

Function
Data bus D0 (LSB) Data bus D1 Data bus D2 Data bus D3 Data bus D4 Data bus D5 Data bus D6 Data bus D7 Data bus D8 Data bus D9 Data bus D10 Data bus D11 Data bus D12 Data bus D13 Data bus D14 Data bus D15 Ground
Dot clock 4.17MHz Pixel data clock 25MHz Interrupt request Ready Data strobe Address strobe Read/write select Access mode(print/reg.) FPGA connect (same for RGB))
FPGA connect (same for RGB)
FPGA connect (same for RGB)
Head 1 blue line sync clock
Head 1 green line sync clock
Head 1 red line sync clock
Head 2 blue line sync clock
Head 2 green line sync clock
Head 2 red line sync clock

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

4-2. Downloadsinterface (for connection with flash ROM EPC2) (MCN2)


1) Connector catalog No.: 5547-10A (Molex).
2) Pin assignment: See below.
Pin No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

Signal name
TCK
GND
TDO
VCC3.3V
TMS
VCC3.3V
N.C.
N.C.
TDI
GND

I/O
Function
I
JTAG clock pin (pulls down to GND through 1k).

O JTAG data output pin (pulls up to 3.3V through 1k).

JTAG mode select pin (pulls up to 3.3V through 1k).

I
JTAG data input pin (pulls up to 3.3V through 1k).

5. On-board switches
SW
SW1
[MODE]

Setting
Function:
Sets hardware modes.
DIP switch settings:
Bit No
ON/OFF

1
ON

2
OFF

3
ON

4
ON

Setting details:
Bit No Setting
Bit 1
OFF Spare pin
Bit 2
OFF Spare pin
Bit 3
OFF Spare pin
Bit 4
OFF Spare pin

Details/Function

6. On-board test pins


TP
TP10TP11
TP12
TP13
TP14

Silk
[GND]
[1.8V]
[2.5V]
[VCC]

Terminal
GND
+1.8V check terminal.
+2.5V check terminal.
+3.3V check terminal.
Note: All the test pins still have to be installed.

-31

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

3-15. HEAD-BUFF Circuit Board (2710H1010)


1. What it does
Holds one line of the image received from the HDC-PCI Circuit Board, and turns on and off the
exposure heads;
Corrects the differences in sensitivity between pixels (pixel non-uniformity correction); and Corrects
gamma.
2. External view and functions
(1) External view.

(2) Dimensions.
270mm x 170mm x about 10 mm (with six mounting holes).
(3) Functions.
FPGA: EP20K200EFC484-2X (Altera) x 3.
SRAM: IS61LV6416-15T(ISSI) x 6.
EEPROM: AT93C46-10SC-2.7 (Atmel).
3. Power supplies
(1) +5V2A(MAX)

-32

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

4. Connectors
4-1. HDC-PCI Circuit Boardinterface specifications (HBCN1)
1) Connector catalog No.: Half-pitch 68-pin connector 79059 (Molex).
2) Signal level: Differential (+/-) and 3.3V CMOS level.
3) Pin assignment: See below.
Function
Data bus D0 (LSB) +
Data bus D1 +
Data bus D2 +
Data bus D3 +
Data bus D4 +
Data bus D5 +
Data bus D6 +
Data bus D7 +
Data bus D8 +
Data bus D9 +
Data bus D10 +
Data bus D11 +
Data bus D12 +
Data bus D13 +
Data bus D14 +
Data bus D15 +
Ground
Dot clock 4.17MHz +
Pixel data clock 25MHz +
Interrupt request +
Ready +
Data strobe +
Address strobe +
Read/write select +
Access mode(print/reg.) +
Ground
Ground
Ground
Ground (BL1_SYNC return)
Ground (GL1_SYNC return)
Ground (RL1_SYNC return)
Ground (BL2_SYNC return)
Ground (GL2_SYNC return)
Ground (RL2_SYNC return)

Label
+RH_D[0]
+RH_D[1]
+RH_D[2]
+RH_D[3]
+RH_D[4]
+RH_D[5]
+RH_D[6]
+RH_D[7]
+RH_D[8]
+RH_D[9]
+RH_D[10]
+RH_D[11]
+RH_D[12]
+RH_D[13]
+RH_D[14]
+RH_D[15]
GND
+RH_DOTS_CLK
+RH_PCLK
+RH_INT_REQ
+RH_RDY
+RH_DSTB
+RH_ASTB
+RH_RW
+RH_BUS_MODE
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34

Pin
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68

-33

Label
-RH_D[0]
-RH_D[1]
-RH_D[2]
-RH_D[3]
-RH_D[4]
-RH_D[5]
-RH_D[6]
-RH_D[7]
-RH_D[8]
-RH_D[9]
-RH_D[10]
-RH_D[11]
-RH_D[12]
-RH_D[13]
-RH_D[14]
RH_D[15]
GND
-RH_DOTS_CLK
-RH_PCLK
-RH_INT_REQ
-RH_RDY
-RH_DSTB
-RH_ASTB
-RH_RW
-RH_BUS_MODE
RH_INT_RQ2
SPEAR IN2
Ready
BL1_SYNC
GL1_SYNC
RL1_SYNC
BL2_SYNC
GL2_SYNC
RL2_SYNC

Function
Data bus D0 (LSB) Data bus D1 Data bus D2 Data bus D3 Data bus D4 Data bus D5 Data bus D6 Data bus D7 Data bus D8 Data bus D9 Data bus D10 Data bus D11 Data bus D12 Data bus D13 Data bus D14 Data bus D15 Ground
Dot clock 4.17MHz Pixel data clock 25MHz Interrupt request Ready Data strobe Address strobe Read/write select Access mode(print/reg.) FPGA connect (same for RGB)
FPGA connect (same for RGB)
FPGA connect (same for RGB)
Head 1 blue line sync clock
Head 1 green line sync clock
Head 1 red line sync clock
Head 2 blue line sync clock
Head 2 green line sync clock
Head 2 red line sync clock

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

4-2. HEAD-BUFF1 Circuit Boardinterface specifications (HBCN2)


1) Connector catalog No.: Half-pitch 68-pin connector 79059 (Molex).
2) Signal level: Differential (+/-) and 3.3V CMOS level.
3) Pin assignment 4: See below.
Function
Data bus D0 (LSB) +
Data bus D1 +
Data bus D2 +
Data bus D3 +
Data bus D4 +
Data bus D5 +
Data bus D6 +
Data bus D7 +
Data bus D8 +
Data bus D9 +
Data bus D10 +
Data bus D11 +
Data bus D12 +
Data bus D13 +
Data bus D14 +
Data bus D15 +
Ground
Dot clock 4.17MHz +
Pixel data clock 25MHz +
Interrupt request +
Ready +
Data strobe +
Address strobe +
Read/write select +
Access mode(print/reg.) +
Ground
Ground
Ground
Ground (BL1_SYNC return)
Ground (GL1_SYNC return)
Ground (RL1_SYNC return)
Ground (BL2_SYNC return)
Ground (GL2_SYNC return)
Ground (RL2_SYNC return)

Label
+RH_D[0]
+RH_D[1]
+RH_D[2]
+RH_D[3]
+RH_D[4]
+RH_D[5]
+RH_D[6]
+RH_D[7]
+RH_D[8]
+RH_D[9]
+RH_D[10]
+RH_D[11]
+RH_D[12]
+RH_D[13]
+RH_D[14]
+RH_D[15]
GND
+RH_DOTS_CLK
+RH_PCLK
+RH_INT_REQ
+RH_RDY
+RH_DSTB
+RH_ASTB
+RH_RW
+RH_BUS_MODE
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34

Pin
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68

-34

Label
-RH_D[0]
-RH_D[1]
-RH_D[2]
-RH_D[3]
-RH_D[4]
-RH_D[5]
-RH_D[6]
-RH_D[7]
-RH_D[8]
-RH_D[9]
-RH_D[10]
-RH_D[11]
-RH_D[12]
-RH_D[13]
-RH_D[14]
RH_D[15]
GND
-RH_DOTS_CLK
-RH_PCLK
-RH_INT_REQ
-RH_RDY
-RH_DSTB
-RH_ASTB
-RH_RW
-RH_BUS_MODE
RH_INT_RQ2
SPEAR IN2
Ready
BL1_SYNC
GL1_SYNC
RL1_SYNC
BL2_SYNC
GL2_SYNC
RL2_SYNC

Function
Data bus D0 (LSB) Data bus D1 Data bus D2 Data bus D3 Data bus D4 Data bus D5 Data bus D6 Data bus D7 Data bus D8 Data bus D9 Data bus D10 Data bus D11 Data bus D12 Data bus D13 Data bus D14 Data bus D15 Ground
Dot clock 4.17MHz Pixel data clock 25MHz Interrupt request Ready Data strobe Address strobe Read/write select Access mode(print/reg.) FPGA connect (same for RGB)
FPGA connect (same for RGB)
FPGA connect (same for RGB)
Head 1 blue line sync clock
Head 1 green line sync clock
Head 1 red line sync clock
Head 2 blue line sync clock
Head 2 green line sync clock
Head 2 red line sync clock

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

4-3. R-MTCL Circuit Boardinterface specifications (HBCN3)


1) Connector catalog No.: Angle connector for flat cable (2.54 pitch) (PS-30PE-D4LT (JEL) or
equivalent).
Signal interface input: Use Schmidt buffer (74HC14, etc.) for connection.
Signal interface output 5: TTL open collector output (pulled up to 5V through 10k on this
circuit board).
2) Pin assignment: See below.
Pin No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30

Signal name
START
BCARRY1
GCARRY1
RCARRY1
FLASH
PTIFLASH
GND
GND
READY
RESETM
BSTART1
GSTART1
RSTART1
FB_START
FB_READY
FB_B_CH
GND
GND
FB_G_CH
FB_R_CH
CH_STS0
CH_STS1
PWR_B
PWR_G
STD_SENS
LED_ON
B_SEL_IN
G_SEL_IN
GND
GND

I/O
I
I
I
I
I
I

Description
Start-of-exposure signal.
Block 1 Carry B synchronizing signal.
Block 1 Carry G synchronizing signal.
Block 1 Carry R synchronizing signal.
Head flash signal (H: Flash, L: Stop).
Head petty flash signal (H: Flash, L: Stop).

Signal level
5V
5V
5V
5V
5V
5V

O
I
I
I
I
I
O
I

Ready signal to MC (H: Ready, L: Busy).


Reset signal from MC.
B head start-of-exposure signal.
G head start-of-exposure signal.
R head start-of-exposure signal.
Start of light measuring (L: Start, H: End).
Feedback control ready signal (H: Ready, L: Busy).
B feedback send/light cycle signal (L: Send/light).

5V
5V
5V
5V
5V
5V
5V
5V

I
I
O
O
I
I
I
O
I
I

G feedback send/light cycle signal (L: Send/light).


R feedback send/light cycle signal (L: Send/light).
Send/emit signal 0.
Send/emit signal 0.
Power to B head (H: On, L: Off).
Power to G head (H: On, L: Off).
Exposure reference sensor signal (from MC).
Power to LED heads (to MC) (L: On, H: Off).
B Ef/Ecc voltage select signal (H: Normal, L: Low).
G Ef/Ecc voltage select signal (H: Normal, L: Low).

5V
5V
5V
5V
5V
5V
5V
5V
5V
5V

-35

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

4-4. Headsinterface specifications (HBCN4)


1) Connector catalog No.: FCN-245D080-G/E (Fujitsu) or equivalent.
2) Signal level: 5V TTL. 3) Pin assignment 1: See below.
Pin No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44

Signal name
B_DO3
B_DO7
B_DO2
B_DO6
B_DO1
B_DO5
B_DO0
B_DO4
GND
GND
B_DE3
B_DE7
B_DE2
B_DE6
B_DE1
B_DE5
B_DE0
B_DE4
GND
GND
B_BS
B_OC
B_DST
GND
B_SCK
GND
G_DO3
G_DO7
G_DO2
G_DO6
G_DO1
G_DO5
G_DO0
G_DO4
GND
GND
G_DE3
G_DE7
G_DE2
G_DE6
G_DE1
G_DE5
G_DE0
G_DE4

I/O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O

Description
Data ODD3 (B VFPH signal).
Data ODD7 (B VFPH signal).
Data ODD2 (B VFPH signal).
Data ODD6 (B VFPH signal).
Data ODD1 (B VFPH signal).
Data ODD5 (B VFPH signal).
Data ODD0 (B VFPH signal).
Data ODD4 (B VFPH signal).

Signal level
3.3V
3.3V
3.3V
3.3V
3.3V
3.3V
3.3V
3.3V

O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O

Data EVEN3 (B VFPH signal).


Data EVEN7 (B VFPH signal).
Data EVEN2 (B VFPH signal).
Data EVEN6 (B VFPH signal).
Data EVEN1 (B VFPH signal).
Data EVEN5 (B VFPH signal).
Data EVEN0 (B VFPH signal).
Data EVEN4 (B VFPH signal).

3.3V
3.3V
3.3V
3.3V
3.3V
3.3V
3.3V
3.3V

O
O
O

H: 16-bit access, L: 8-bit access (B VFPH signal).


Data strobe signal (B VFPH signal).
Data load signal (B VFPH signal).

3.3V
3.3V
3.3V

Head clock signal (B VFPH signal).

3.3V

O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O

Data ODD3 (G VFPH signal).


Data ODD7 (G VFPH signal).
Data ODD2 (G VFPH signal).
Data ODD6 (G VFPH signal).
Data ODD1 (G VFPH signal).
Data ODD5 (G VFPH signal).
Data ODD0 (G VFPH signal).
Data ODD4 (G VFPH signal).

3.3V
3.3V
3.3V
3.3V
3.3V
3.3V
3.3V
3.3V

O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O

Data EVEN3 (G VFPH signal).


Data EVEN7 (G VFPH signal).
Data EVEN2 (G VFPH signal).
Data EVEN6 (G VFPH signal).
Data EVEN1 (G VFPH signal).
Data EVEN5 (G VFPH signal).
Data EVEN0 (G VFPH signal).
Data EVEN4 (G VFPH signal).

3.3V
3.3V
3.3V
3.3V
3.3V
3.3V
3.3V
3.3V

-36

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

4) Pin assignment 2: See below.


Pin No.
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80

Signal name
GND
GND
G_BS
G_OC
G_DST
GND
G_SCK
GND
GND
R_DATA7
R_CS
R_DATA8
R_SO
R_DATA5
R_SCK
R_DATA6
R_SI
GND
GND
R_DATA3
R_STRB
R_DATA4
R_LOAD
R_DATA1
R_CLK
R_DATA2
GND
GND
ROM_CS
ROM_SCK
ROM_SI
ROM_SO
BG-CONT
BG-SEL
GND
GND

I/O

Description

Signal level

O
O
O

H:16-bit access, L: 8-bit access (G VFPH signal).


Data strobe signal (G VFPH signal).
Data load signal (B VFPH signal).

3.3V
3.3V
3.3V

Head clock signal (G VFPH signal).

3.3V

O
O
O
I
O
O
O
O

Data 7 (R LED signal).


R EEPROM chip select signal.
Data 8 (R LED signal).
R EEPROM serial data input signal.
Data 5 (R LED signal).
R EEPROM clock signal.
Data 6 (R LED signal).
EEPROM serial data output signal.

3.3V
3.3V
3.3V
3.3V
3.3V
3.3V
3.3V
3.3V

O
O
O
O
O
O

Data 3 (R LED signal).


Data strobe signal (R LED signal).
Data 4 (R LED signal).
Data load signal (R LED signal).
Data 1 (R LED signal).
Head clock signal (R LED signal).
Data 2 (R LED signal).

3.3V
3.3V
3.3V
3.3V
3.3V
3.3V
3.3V

O
O
O
I
O
O

Exposure Unit EEPROM chip select signal.


Exposure Unit EEPROM clock signal.
Exposure Unit EEPROM data output signal.
Exposure Unit EEPROM data input signal.
BG Ef/Ecc/Ebb output control (H: Output, L: Stop) (initially set to L).
BGEf/Ecc voltage select signal H: Low, L: Normal) (initially set to L).

5V
5V
5V
5V
Note 1)

-37

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

4-5. Powerinterface (HBCN5)


1) Connector catalog No.: 3.96-/7.92-pitch, right angle 5278-NA (Molex).
2) Pin assignment: See below.
Pin No.
1
2
3
4
5
6

Signal name
Vcc
Vcc
Vcc
GND
GND
GND

Description
5V input power.
5V input power.
5V input power.

4-6. Downloadsinterface (for connection with Flash ROM EPC2) (HBCN6)


1) Connector catalog No.: 5547-10A (Molex).
2) Pin assignment: See below.
Pin No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

Signal name
TCK
GND
TDO
VCC3.3V
TMS
VCC3.3V
N.C.
N.C.
TDI
GND

I/O
Description
I
JTAG clock signal (pulled down to GND through 1k).

O JTAG data output pin (pulled up to 3.3V through 1k).

JTAG mode select pin (pulled up to 3.3Vthrough 1k).

I
JTAG data input pin (pulled up to 3.3V through 1k).

4-7. Power to headsinterface (HBCN7) 5


1) Connector catalog No.: 2.5mm-pitch right angle (5046-10A).
2) Signal level: TTL open collector output (pulled up to 5V through 10kon this circuit board).
3) Pin assignment: See below.
Pin No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

Signal name
B_CONT
GND
B_SEL
GND
G_CONT
GND
G_SEL
GND
RES1
GND

Description
I/O
O B Ef/Ecc/Ebb output control (H: Output, L: Stop).

B Ef/Ecc voltage select signal (H: Normal, L: Low).

G Ef/Ecc/Ebb output control (H: Output, L: Stop).

G Ef/Ecc voltage select signal (H: Normal, L: Low).

-38

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

4-8. Downloadsinterface (for direct connection with PC) (HBCN8)


1) Connector catalog No.: 5547-10A (Molex).
2) Pin assignment: See below.
Pin No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

Signal name
TCK
GND
TDO
VCC3.3V
TMS J
VCC3.3V
N.C.
N.C.
TDI
GND

Description
I/O
I
JTAG clock pin (pulled down to GND through 1k)

O JTAG data output pin

JTAG mode select pin (pulled up to 3.3V through 1k)

I
JTAG data input pin (pulled up to 3.3V through 1k)

4-9. Boundary scansinterface (for connection with Flash ROM EPC2) (HBCN9)
1) Connector catalog No.: 5547-10A (Molex).
2) Pin assignment: See below.
Pin No. Signal name
1
TRST
2
3

GND
TDO

4
5

GND
TDI

6
7

GND
TMS

8
9

GND
TCK

10

GND

Description
I/O
I
JTAG reset input (pulled up to 3.3V through 10k)
connected to all 20k resistors (TRSTD12).

O JTAG data output pin (connected via 22 damper resistor)


to 20k resistor in the final step (TDOE11).

I
JTAG data output pin (pulled up to 3.3Vthrough 10k)
connected to 20k resistor in the 1st step (TDIM5).

I
JTAG mode select pin (pulled up to 3.3V through 10k)
connected to all 20k resistors (TMSW13).

I
JTAG clock pin (connected to GND in series with 68 and 100pf resistors)
to all 20k resistors (TCKW12).

Note 1)

Note 1)

Note: All the resistors still have to be installed.

-39

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

5. On-board switches
Setting

SW
SW1
[MODE]

Function:
Sets hardware modes.
DIP switch settings:
Bit No
ON/OFF

1
OFF

2
OFF

3
OFF

4
OFF

5
OFF

6
OFF

7
OFF

8
OFF

Setting details:
Bit No Setting

Details/function
Selects HEAD-BUFF CB 1 or 2 for twin heads.
Off: CB 1, On: CB 2.

Bit 1

OFF

Bit 2

OFF

Bit 3

OFF

Bit 4

OFF

Selects test pattern mode; On: Test pattern,


Off: Normal.

Bit 5

OFF

Selects VFPH exposure mode. On: Exposure


in four sections, Off: Exposure in layers.

Bit 6

OFF

Selects LED exposure mode. On: exposure in


two sections, Off: Exposure in layers.

Bit 7

OFF

Bypasses correction. On: Bypasses LUT as


well as pixel non-uniformity correction.

Bit 8

OFF

Sets up dummy paper. On: Paper sensor signal


is forcibly changed into paper-is-found.

Switches test pattern over to LED correction


value, and vice versa (see note).
Bit2 Bit3 LED correction Test pattern
Off Off 0b000 (light) Vertical lines
Off On 0b0111 Horizontal lines
On Off 0b1000 Blinking pixels
On On ob1111 (dark) Red dots in tiers

Note: When you turn on the power, the LED correction value is selected.
After you turn on the power (for about 3 seconds), the test pattern
used in test patter mode is selected.

6. On-board test pins


TP
TP1
TP2
TP3
TP4

Silk
[VCC]
[1.8V]
[GND]
[GND]

Terminal
+3.3V check terminal.
+1.8V check terminal.
GND terminal.
GND terminal.
Note: All the test pins still have to be installed.

-40

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

3-16. PRINTER-CPU Circuit Board (2710H1020)


1. What it does
Controls the mechanical components of the printer.
2. External view and functions
(1) External view.

TP1
TP2

TP6

TP4

TP5

SW2

SW1

(2) Dimensions.
240mm x 120mm x about 30mm (with five mounting holes).
(3) Functions.
CPU: HD64F2339 (25MHz clock).
I/O:
Analog input 8 channels.
Logical input 40 channels.
+5V output 66 channels.
Clock output 7 channels.
Serial bus 1 channel.
Serial communication (RS-232-C) 3 channels.
3. Power supplies
(1) +5V 2A (max )

-41

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

4. Connectors
Connector
PCCN1

Connector
PCCN2

Function
Power.

Pin No.
1. 5V-2
2. 5V-1(with on-off control).
3. GND(5V-2)
4. GND(5V-1)

Function
Sub-drive unit signals.

Pin No.
1. *SD_CLK
2. *SDA_PD
3. *SDA_EN
4. *SDA_CW
5. *ACD_CLK
6. *ACD_EN
7. *ACD_CW
8. *FD_CLK
9. *FD_PD
10. *FD_EN
11. *FD_CW
12. *CUT_ON
13. *CLT_ON
14. *NIP1_ON
15. *SDOS_CNT
16. *RET_SDU
17. *SDOS_AD
18. *CHS
19. *CCS
20. *FCS
21. *NIP1_US
22. *NIP1_DS
23. SDOS
24. *DAS
25. 5V-1
26. GND

-42

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

Connector
PCCN3

Connector
PCCN4

Function

Pin No.

Exposure feed unit signals. 1. *MDM_CLK


2. *MDM_23
3. *MDM_PD
4. *MDM_EN
5. *MDM_CW
6. *NIP2_CLK
7. *NIP2_EN
8. *NIP3_CLK
9. *NIP3_EN
10. *NIP4_CLK
11. *NIP4_EN
12. *NIP_PD
13. STDS_AD
14. STDS
15. *NIP2_US
16. *NIP2_DS
17. *NIP3_US
18. *NIP3_DS
19. *NIP4_US
20. *NIP4_DS
21. *RET_EFU
22. GND
23. 5V-1
24. GND
Function
Discharge unit signals.

Pin No.
1. *PFU_TXD
2. *PFU_RXD
3. *PFU_RST
5. *PFU_BUSY
6. *FOM_DRV
7. *BPSA
8. *POSA
9. *BPSB
10. *POSB
11. *RET_PFU
13. 5V-1
4.12.14. GND

-43

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

Connector
PCCN5

Connector
PCCN6

Function

Pin No.

Communication with HEADBUFF Circuit Board.


Carry signals.
Flashing.
Power control.

1. START
2. BCARRY1
3. GCARRY1
4. RCARRY1
5. FLASHB
6. FLASHG
9. READY
10. RESETM
11. BSTART1
12. GSTART1
13. RSTART1
14. FB_START
15. FB_READY
16. FB_B_CH
19. FB_G_CH
20. FB_R_CH
21. CH_STS0
22. CH_STS1
23. PWR_B
24. PWR_G
25. STD_SENS
26. LED_ON
27. B_SEL_IN
28. G_SEL_IN
7.8.17.18.29.30. GND

Function

Pin No.

Communication with HEADBUFF Circuit Board.


Carry signals.
Flashing.
Power control.
Note: Used for double feed
(not used on the R1).

1. START
2. BCARRY1
3. GCARRY1
4. RCARRY1
5. FLASHB
6. FLASHG
9. READY
10. RESETM
11. BSTART1
12. GSTART1
13. RSTART1
14. FB_START
15. FB_READY
16. FB_B_CH
19. FB_G_CH
20. FB_R_CH
21. CH_STS0
22..CH_STS1
23. PWR_B
24..PWR_G
25..STD_SENS
26..LED_ON
27. B_SEL_IN
28.G_SEL_IN
7.8.17.18.29.30. GND

-44

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

Connector
PCCN7

Connector
PCCN8

Connector
PCCN9

Connector
PCCN10

Function
Sensor signals.
End of paper.
Splice.
Magazine data.
Door.

Pin No.
1. MGLS
4. SPSA
5. PESA
6. SPSB
7. PESB
9. PES_CNT
10. SPS_CNT
12. MSS5
13. MSS4
14. MSS3
15. MSS2
16. MSS1
17. MSS0
19. MG_SELA
20. MG_SELB
21. DOOR_SENS
3.8.11. 5V
2.18.22. GND

Function

Pin No.

Communication with double 1. DIN


magazine unit (serial bus). 2. *DIN
3. DOUT
4. *DOUT
5. SCLK
6. *SCLK
7. LACH
8. *LACH
9. *SD-CLK
10.11.12. NC
Function
Serial PC signals.

Pin No.
1. *TXD
2. *RXD
3. *RESET
4. GND
5. *DTR

Function
Serial paper processor
signals.

Pin No.
1. *MRRXD
2. *RBUSY
3. *MRTXD
4. *PRESET
5. NC
6. *RDRIVE
7. GND
8. *RINTLOCK
9. GND
10. NC

-45

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

Connector
PCCN11

Function
Power control signals.
5V
3.3V
24V

Connector
PCCN12

Pin No.
1. *SUP33_CNT
2. *SUP5_CNT
3. *SUP24_CNT
4. COUNTER_CNT
5. FAN1_CNT
6. GND

Function

Pin No.

JTAG

1. TCK
2.10. GND
3. TDO
4.6. 3.3V
5. TMS
7.8. NC
9. TDI

5. On-board switches
SW
SW1
[MODE]

Setting
Function:
Sets hardware modes.
DIP switch settings:
1
OFF

Bit No
ON/OFF

2
OFF

3
OFF

4
OFF

5
OFF

6
OFF

7
OFF

8
OFF

Setting details:
Bit No Setting
Bit 1
OFF
Bit 2
OFF
Bit 3
OFF
Bit 4
OFF
Bit 5
OFF
Bit 6
OFF
Bit 7
OFF
Bit 8

SW2
[RESET]

Details/function

ON

For factory use (to enable write to boot ROM).

OFF

For normal use.

Function:
Pressing this switch resets CPU.

-46

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

6. On-board test pins


TP
TP2TP5TP6
TP1
TP3
TP4

Silk
[GND]
[5V]
[3.3V]
[2.5V]

Terminal
GND terminal.
+5V check terminal.
+3.3V check terminal.
+2.5V check terminal.

-47

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

3-17. LCD-CPU Circuit Board (2710H1030)


1. What it does
Controls the LCD on the printer.
Main items it controls:
LCD module.
Touch Panel.
2. External view and functions
(1) External view

(2) Dimensions.
155mm x 95mm x about 10mm (with four mounting holes).
(3)
Functions.
CPU: HD64F2339 (12MHz clock).
LCD controller: M66273FP (Mitsubishi).
USB controller: ML60852A-TB (Oki).
I/O:
Analog input 3 channels.
Serial communication (RS-232-C) 1 channel.
USB. 1 channel.
LCD controller 1 channel.h
3. Power supplies
(1) +5V 1A (max )

-48

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

4. Connectors
Connector
LCCN1

Function
LCD module.

Connector
LCCN2

Touch Panel.

Connector
LCCN5

Pin No.
1. Y1
2. X1
3. Y2
4. X2

Function

Pin No.

Power and serial communica- 1. +5V


tion (RS-232-C).
2. +5V
3. GND
4. GND
5. TXD
6. RXD
7. DSR
8. DTR

Connector
LCCN4

1. V_LED
2. -24V
3. VD3
4. VD2
5. VD1
6. VD0
7. -24V
8. GND
9. 5V
10. CP
11. LP
12. FILM
13. NC
14. LEDENB

Function

Connector
LCCN3

Pin No.

Function
USB

Pin No.
1. USB_VBUS
2. D3. D+
4. GND

Function
Power to inverter.

Pin No.
1. *CFL_ON
2. GND
3. +5V

-49

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

5. On-board switches
SW
SW1
[MODE]

Setting
Function:
Sets hardware modes.
DIP switch settings:
Bit No
ON/OFF

1
OFF

Setting details:
Bit No Setting
Bit 1

SW2
[RESET]

Details/function

ON

For factory use (to enable write to boot ROM).

OFF

For normal use.

Function:
Pressing this switch resets CPU.

6. On-board test pins


TP
TP1
TP2
TP3
TP4
TP5
TP6
TP7
TP8
TP9

Silk
[5V]
[GND]
[3.3V]
[VY 1]
[VX]
[-24V]
[-5V]
[DCP_OUT]
[V_LED]

Terminal
+5V check terminal.
GND terminal.
+3.3V terminal.
Touch Panel check terminal.
Touch Panel check terminal.
-24V check terminal.
-5V check terminal.
LCD contrast-adjusting voltage check terminal.

7. On-board potentiometers
LED
VR1

Silk
[VR1]

Function
Key beeper volume adjustment.
Note: VR1 is factory-adjusted. Do not tamper with it in the field.

-50

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

3-18. PSA Circuit Board (2710H1040)


1. What it does
In-line circuit board connecting power to the printer.
It distributes the DC power from the switching power supplies to the various units.
It also has the on-board DC-DC converter generating 15V.
2. External view and functions
(1) External view

(2) Dimensions
190mm x 75mm x about 30mm (with six mounting holes).
(3) Functions.
Input:
24V-1.
24V-2.
5V-1.
5V-2.
Output:
Dual magazine unit.
Paper processor and LCD.
Fan, electromagnetic counter, and paper dust removal fan.
Power cooling fan.
Power control signals.
Spare.
3. Power supplies
(1) 24V-1 2.6A (MAX)
(2) 24V-2 1.3A (MAX)
(3) 5V-1 4.0A (MAX)
(4) 5V-2 1.7A (MAX)
(5) 36V 1.7A (MAX)

-51

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

4. Connectors
Connector
PSCN1

Function
Power to dual magazine.

Connector
PSCN2

Power to LCD and paper


processor.

Pin No.
1. 5V-2
2. DGND
3. +15V
4. AGND
5. -15V
6. PGND
7. 24V-2
8. 36V
9. 5V-2
10. DGND
11. 24V-2
12. PGND

Function
Fan and electromagnetic
counter

Connector
PSCN4

1. 5V-1
2. DGND
3. 24V-1
4. PGND
5. 36V
6. PGND

Function

Connector
PSCN3

Pin No.

Pin No.
1. 24V-2
2. PGND
3. 24V-2
4. COUNTER_ON
5. 24V-1
6. FAN1_ON
7. NC
8. NC

Function
Densitometer.

Pin No.
1. 5V-1
2. DGND
3. 24V-1
4. GND
Note: The connectors still have to be installed.

Connector
PSCN5

Function
Spare.

Pin No.
1. 5V-1
2. DGND
3. 24V-1
4. GND

-52

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

Connector
PSCN6

Connector
PSCN7

Connector
PSCN8

Connector
PSCN9

Function
Input control signals.

Pin No.
1. SUP33_CNT
2. SUP5_CNT
3. SUP24_CNT
4. COUNTER_CNT
5. FAN1_CNT
6. DGND

Function
Input power.

Pin No.
1. 24V-2
2. PGND
3. 5V-2
4. DGND
5. 24V-1
6. PGND
7. 5V-1
8. DGND
9. 36V
10. PGND

Function
Power on/off signals.

Pin No.
1. RC+3.3V
2. RC-(3.3V)
3. RC+(5V)
4. RC-(5V)
5. RC+(24V)
6. NC

Function
Power unit cooling fan.

Pin No.
1. 24V-2
2. PGND

-53

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

5. On-board test pins


TP
TP1
TP2
TP3
TP4
TP5
TP6
TP7
TP8

Silk
[24V-1]
[36V]
[24V-2]
[+15V]
]-15V]
[ND]
[5V-1]
[5V-2]

Terminal
+24V check terminal (with on-off control).
+36V check terminal.
+24V check terminal.
+15V check terminal.
-15V check terminal.
GND terminal.
+5V check terminal (with on-off control).
+5V check terminal.

6. On-board LEDs
LED
LED1
LED2

Silk
[5V-1]
[5V-2 ]

What it indicates
Lights in red when 5V is applied (with on-off control).
Lights in green when 5V is applied.

-54

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

3-19. SDU-DRV Circuit Board (2710H1200)


1. What it does
Driver circuit board for the sub-drive unit on the printer.
Main items it controls:
Paper feed.
Cutter.
2. External view and functions
(1) External view.

(2) Dimensions.
220mm x 74mm x about 30 mm (with six mounting holes).
(3) Functions.
I/O:
Logical input 7 channels.
+5V output 1 channel.
+24V output 3 channels.
Pulse motor driver 3 channels.
3. Power supplies
(1) +5V 1A (max )
(2) +24V 4A (max)

-55

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

4. Connectors
Connector
SDCN1

Connector
SDCN2

Connector
SDCN3

Function

Pin No.

Interface with PRINTER-CPU. 1. SD_CLK


2. *SD_PD
3. *SD_EN
4. *SD_CW
5. *ACD_CLK
6. *ACD_PD
7. *ACD_EN
8. *ACD_CW
9. *FD_CLK
10. *FD_EN
11. *FD_CW
12. *CUT_ON
13. *CLT_ON
14. *NIP1_ON
15. *SDOS_CNT
16. *RET_SDU
17. *SDOS_AD
18. *CHS
19. *CCS
20. *FCS
21. *NIP1US
22. *NIP1DS
23. SDOS
24. *DSA
Function
Power supplies.

Pin No.
1. 5V-1(with on-off control).
2. 24V-1
3. 24V-1
4. DGND
5. PGND
6. PGND

Function
Sub-drive motor.

Pin No.
1. SDM_A
2. SDM_*A
3. SDM_B
4. SDM_*B
5. COM(+24V)
6. COM(+24V)

-56

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

Connector
SDCN4

Connector
SDCN5

Connector
SDCN6

Connector
SDCN7

Function
Cutter unit.

Pin No.
1. +5V
2. CHS_IN
3. GND
4. +5V
5. CCS_IN
6. GND
7. CUT
8. CUT9. +24V
10.+24V_RET
11.NC
12.NC

Function
Flap motor.
Electromagnetic brake.

Pin No.
1. FDM_A
2. FDM_*A
3. FDM_B
4. FDM_*B
5. COM(+24V)
6. COM(+24V)
7. +24V
8. *CLT_DRV

Function
Accumulator motor.
Nip 1 solenoid.
Nip 1 sensor.
SD exit sensor.

Pin No.
1. ADM_A
2. ADM_*A
3. ADM_B
4. ADM_*B
5. COM(+24V)
6. COM(+24V)
7. +24V
8. *NIP1_DRV
9. +5V
10.NIP1US_IN
11. GND
12. +5V
13. NIP1DS_IN
14. GND
15. +5V
16. *LED_DRV
17. *SDOS_IN
18. NC

Function
Sensor signals.
Duct sensor.
Flap close sensor.

Pin No.
1. +5V
2. DAS_IN
3. FCS_IN
4. GND

-57

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

5. On-board test pins


TP
TP1
TP2
TP4
TP5
TP6
TP7
TP8
TP9
TP10

Silk
[5V]
[24V-1]
[GND]
[SDM]
[ADM]
[FDM]
[CLT]
[CUT]
[NIP1]

Terminal
+5V check terminal.
+24V check terminal.
GND terminal.
Sub-drive motor clock.
Accumulator motor clock.
Flap motor clock.
Electromagnetic brake-on signal.
Cutter-on signal.
Nip 1 solenoid-on signal.

-58

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

3-20. EFU-DRV Circuit Board (2710H1210)


1. What it does
Driver circuit board for the exposure feed unit on the printer.
Main items it controls:
Paper feed.
Nip rollers.
2. External view and functions
(1) External view.

(2) Dimensions.
180mm x 80mm x about 30mm (with six mounting holes).
(3) Functions.
I/O:
Logical input 7 channels.
+5V output 4 channels.
Clock output 1 channel.
Pulse motor driver 3 channels.
3. Power supplies
(1) +5V 1.0A(max )
(2) +24V 3.5A(max)

-59

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

4. Connectors
Connector
EFCN1

Function
Interface with Printer CPU. 1. *MDM_CLK
2. *MDM_W23
3. *MDM_PD
4. *MDM_EN
5. *MDM_CW
6. *NIP2D_CLK
7. *NIP2D_EN
8. *NIP3D_CLK
9. *NIP3D_EN
10. *NIP4D_CLK
11. *NIP4_EN
12. *NIP_PD
13. NC
14. STDS
15. *NIP2US
16. *NIP2DS
17. *NIP3US
18. *NIP3DS
19. *NIP4US
20. *NIP4DS
21. 22. 23. 24. NC

Connector
EFCN2

Function
Power supply.

Connector
EFCN3

Pin No.

Pin No.
1. 5V-1(with on-off control).
2. 24V-1
3. 24V-1
4. DGND
5. PGND
6. PGND

Function
Sensors.

Pin No.
1. 4.7.10.13.16.19. +5V
2. NIP2US
5. NIP2DS
8. NIP3US
11. NIP3DS
14. NIP4US
17. NIP4DS
20. *STDS
3.6.9.12.15.18.21. GND
22. NC

-60

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

Connector
EFCN4

Function
NIP2 motor.

Connector
EFCN5

1. NIP2D_A
2. NIP2D_*A
3. NIP2D_B
4. NIP2D_*B
5. COM(+24V)
6. COM(+24V)

Function
NIP3 motor.

Connector
EFCN6

Pin No.

Pin No.
1. NIP3D_A
2. NIP3D_*A
3. NIP3D_B
4. NIP3D_*B
5. COM(+24V)
6. COM(+24V)

Function
NIP4 motor.

Pin No.
1. NIP4D_A
2. NIP4D_*A
3. NIP4D_B
4. NIP4D_*B
5. COM(+24V)
6. COM(+24V)

5. On-board test pins


Test pin
TP1
TP2
TP3
TP4
TP5
TP6
TP7
TP8
TP9

Silk
[5V]
[NIP2_PS]
[GND]
[MDM]
[NIP2]
[NIP3]
[NIP4]
[NIP3_PS]
[NIP4_PS]

Terminal
+5Vcheck terminal.
+24V check terminal for NIP2 motor.
GND terminal.
Main feed motor clock.
NIP2 motor clock.
NIP3 motor clock.
NIP4 motor clock.
+24V check terminal for NIP3 motor.
+24V check terminal for NIP4 motor.

-61

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

3-21. PFU-DRV Circuit Board (2710H1230)


1. What it does
Controls the discharge unit on the printer.
Main items it controls:
Paper feed.
Back printer.
2. External view and functions
(1) External view.

(2) Dimensions.
157mm x 104mm x about 30 mm (with four mounting holes).
(3) Functions.
CPU: HD64F2338 (25MHz clock).
I/O:
Logical input 5 channels.
+5V output 12 channels.
+24V output 15 channels.
Clock output 2 channels.
Serial communication (RS-232-C) 1 channel.
Pulse motor driver 1 channel.
3. Power supplies
(1) +5V 1A (max )
(2) +24V 2A (max)

-62

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

4. Connectors
Connector
PFCN1

Function
Communication with
PRINTER-CPU.
Serial communication
(RS-232-C).
Status communication.

Connector
PFCN2

Connector
PFCN3

Connector
PFCN4

Pin No.
1. *P-CPU_RXD
2. *PFU_BUSY
3. *P-CPU_TXD
4. *PFU_RST
5. *FOM_DRV
6. BPSA
7. GND
8. POSA
9. BPSB
10. POSB

Function
Power.

Pin No.
1. 5V-1with on-off control.
2. 24V
3. PGND
4. DGND
5. 24V
6. PGND

Function
Pulse motor.

Pin No.
1. FOM_A
2. FOM_*A
3. FOM_B
4. FOM_*B
5. COM(+24V)
6. COM(+24V)

Function
Print head (BP1).

Pin No.
1. *bit1
2. *bit3
3. *bit5
4. *bit7
5. +24V
6. +24V
7. NC
8. *bit6
9. *bit4
10.*bit2
11.NC
12.PGND

-63

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

Connector
PFCN5

Connector
PFCN6

Connector
PFCN7

Connector
PFCN8

Connector
PFCN9

Function
Print head (BP2).

Pin No.
1. *bit1
2. *bit3
3. *bit5
4. *bit7
5. +24V
6. +24V
7. NC
8. *bit6
9. *bit4
10.*bit2
11.NC
12.PGND

Function
Ribbon motor.

Pin No.
1. +24V
2. *RibonM

Function
Sensor signals:
BP reference sensor.
Exit sensor.

Pin No.
1. +5V
2. *POSA
3. GND
4. +5V
5. *BPSA
6. GND
7. V
8. *BPSB
9. GND
10. +5V
11. *POSB
12. GND

Function
Exposure feed unitcooling fan.

Pin No.
1. +24V
2. PGND

Function

Pin No.

Print head (for double feed). 1. *BPD1


3. *BPD2
5. *BPD3
7. *BPD4
9. *BPD5
11.*BPD6
13.*BPD7
15.*BPSP
17.*BPD8
2.4.6.8.10.12.14.16.18. +5V
19.20. GND

-64

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

Connector
PFCN10

Function

Pin No.

Power to print head


(for double feed).

1. +24V
2. PGND

5. On-board switches
SW
SW1
[MODE]

Setting
Function:
Sets hardware modes.
DIP switch settings:
Bit No
ON/OFF

1
OFF

2
OFF

3
OFF

4
OFF

5
OFF

6
OFF

7
OFF

8
OFF

Setting details:
Bit No Setting
Bit 1
OFF
Bit 2
OFF
Bit 3
OFF
Bit 4
OFF
Bit 5
OFF
Bit 6
OFF
Bit 7
OFF
Bit 8

ON
OFF

SW2
[RESET]

Details/function

For factory use


(to enable write to boot ROM).
For normal use.

Function:
Pressing this switch resets CPU.

6. On-board test pins


TP
TP1
TP2
TP3
TP4
TP5
TP6
TP7
TP8
TP9

Silk
[5V]
[GND]
[3.3V]
[24V]
[PG]
[FOM_CK]
[BP_ON]
[BP_STB]
[BP_CLK]

Terminal
+5V check terminal.
GND check terminal.
+3.3V check terminal.
+24V check terminal.
PGND terminal.
Discharge motor clock.
BP-on signal.
BP strobe signal.
Clock reference for control of BP.

-65

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

3-22. SCANNER DRIVING board (56GA-9090-00)


1. What it does
Drive and control 3 phase stepping motor
2. External view and functions
(1) External view

(2) Dimensions
94 x 17 x around 45 mm (with four mounting holes)
3. Supplied power
(1) +5V 1A(max )
(2) +24V 4A(max)

-66

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

4. Connectors
Connector
CN600

Function

Pin No..

Power supply (input)

Connector
CN610

1. 5V
2. GND
34. 24V
56. PG

Function

Pin No.

Motor control signal

1. MCLK
2. MA/*LEFT
3. W23P/*23P
4. V0
5. V1
6. V2
715. not used
Note: CN621, CN622 and CN623 are not used.

5. On-board test pins


TP
TP1
TP2
TP3
TP4

Silk
[SGND]
[5V]
[PGND]
[24V]

Terminal
SGND
+5V check terminal
PGND
+24V check terminal
Note: There are any real test pins on board.

-67

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

3-23. HEAD-TRM board (2710H1220)


1. What it does
Relay board for power supply of exposure head.
S-ROM for saving the data of exposure head is mounted on the board.
2. External view and functions
(1) External view

(2) Dimensions
7050around 15mm (with four mounting holes)
(3) Function
Input
5V-2
24V-2
3.3V
Output
VFPH power supply board
LED exposure head
3. Supplied power
(1) 5V-2 0.5A (MAX)
(2) 24V-2 1.0A (MAX)
(3) 3.3V 10A (MAX)

-68

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

4. Connectors
Connector
HTCN1

Connector
HTCN2

Connector
HTCN3

Connector
HTCN4

Function

Pin No.

Power (Input)

1. 5V
2. 24V
3. 3.3V
4. GND
5. GND
6. GND

Function

Pin No.

LED Head power supply

110. 3.3V
1120. GND

Function

Pin No.

VFPH power supply board

1. 5V
2. GND
3. 24V
4. PG
5. B_CONT
6. GND
7. B_SEL
8. GND
9. 5V
10.GND
11.24V
12.PG
13.G_CONT
14.GND
15.G_SEL
16.GND

Function

Pin No.

S-ROM control
1. ROM_CS
VFPH power supply control 2. ROM_SCK
3. ROM_SI
4. ROM_SO
5. BG_CONT
6. BG_SEL

-69

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

3-24. Fluorescent print head power supply board (271076903)


1. What it does
Dedicated power supply board for fluorescent print head
2. External view and functions
(1) External view

(2) Dimensions
70 x 120 x around 20 mm (with 4 mounting holes)
(3) Functions
Supply power to Fluorescent print heads
1. Filament drive voltage (Ef)
2. Grid drive voltage (Ecc)
3. Anode drive voltage (Ebb)
3. Supplied voltage
(1) 5V 0.5A(MAX)
(2) 24V 1.0A(MAX)

-70

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

4. Connectors
Connector
CN1

Connector
CN2

Connector
CN3

Function
Power

Pin No.
1. Vin24V
2. GND
3. Vdd5V
4. GND

Function
VFPH power

Pin No.
1. Ef1
2. Ef2
3. Ecc
4. Vdd
5. GND
6. Ebb

Function
VFPH control signal

Pin No.
1. PWON (EF, ECC and Ebb output control signal inputterminal)
2. GND
3. VSEL (Ef and Ecc voltage setting change control signal input terminal
4. GND
5. N.C

-71

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

3-25. Inverter board (584076302A)


1. What it does
Inverter board for LCD backlight
2. External view and functions
(1) External view

(2) Dimensions
20 x 100 x around 10 mm (with two mounting holes)
(3) Functions
Input voltage (VB) 4.5 through Vdc
Output voltage (Vao) 8.50 through 1200 Vrms
3. Supplied voltage
(1) 5V 0.6A(MAX)
4. Connectors
Connector
CN71

Connector
CN77

Function
Input power

Pin No.
1. CFL ON/OFF
2. GND
3. VB(5V)

Function
Output power

Pin No.
1. OUT H
2. (N.C)
3. (N.C)
4. OUT L

-72

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

Processor
3-26. Processor-CPU (3590H1500)
1. Outline and external view
(1) External view

(2) Size
170 mm x 170 mm x approxi. 40 mm
(Six board mounting holes provided)
(3) Functions
CPU: PD78C10 (Clock of 14.7456 MHz)
ROM: 27512 x 1 (49 KB)
RAM: 55257 x 1 (8 KB)

-73

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

(4) Main I/O


Input system
Analog input (for temperature measurement, paper detection (ECOJET feeder), sensor
application), 12 channels
+5 V input (Dip switch, float switch, microswitch, etc.), 34 channels
Output system
+5 V output (motor, heater, etc.), 40 channels
Communication system
Serial communication (for master), 34 channel

2. Power supply
(1) +5 V, 1 A (max.)
(2) 15 V, 0.2 A (max.)

3. Connectors
Connector

RCN1 (JAE TX13-50P-D2ST-HI)

Function

Sensor-related input signal and LED display output

No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26

Pin assignment
+5 V
+5 V
+5 V
+5 V
+5 V
+5 V
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
P1LLEV (P1 tank level sensor)
P2LLEV (P2 tank level sensor)
P3LLEV (P3-3 tank level sensor)
SQA type: P1 repl. sensor, J type: WATLLEV (Water supply tank level sensor)
SQA type: P2 repl. sensor, J type: P3/LLEV (P3-1 tank level sensor)
SQA type: P3 repl. sensor, J type: INSP14 (Spare)
OFALEV (Overflow upper limit sensor)
OFBLEV (Overflow lower limit sensor)
SORTSET (Sorter set position detection)
CONVSET (Conveyor set detection)

OVRSW1 (Overflow switch)


OVRSW2
CONVHP1 (Conveyor home position detection 1)

Remark

*1
*1

*1
(Continue)

-74

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

Connector

RCN1 (JAE TX13-50P-D2ST-HI)

Function

Sensor-related input signal and LED display output

No.

Pin assignment

27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50

SORTHP (Sorter home position detection)


CONVHP2 (Conveyor home position detection 2)
ACRS1 (ACR-40 water supply tank level sensor)
ACRS2 (ACR-40 overflow tank level sensor)
INSP10
OVRALED (Overflow switch LED)
OVRBLED

EXS1 (Outlet OUT1 sensor output)


EXS1LED (Outlet OUT1 LED drive)
EXS2 (Outlet OUT2 sensor output)
EXS2LED (Outlet OUT2 LED drive)

P1TEMP (P1 temperature sensor input)


GA (Ground for analog system)
P2TEMP (P2 temperature sensor input)
GA (Ground for analog system)
P3TEMP (P3 temperature sensor input)
GA (Ground for analog system)
DRYTEMP (DRY temperature sensor input)
GA (Ground for analog system)

Remark
*1
*1
*2
*2
*2
*2
*2

*1: Not used on R1 SUPER.


*2: Used on ACR-40 connected.

-75

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

Connector

RCN2 (JAE PS-40PE-D4T1-M1)

Function

+5 V system signal output

No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40

Pin assignment
DRYH2 (Dryer heater 2)
DRYH1 (Dryer heater 1)
P3H (P3 heater)
DRFAN/CLFAN (Dryer fan/cooling fan)
P2H (P2 heater)
P1H (P1 heater)
OVRPUMP (Overflow transter pump)
SP1 Spare
SQA type: P3RPUMP (P3 repl. pump), J type: Water pump
SQA type: P2RPUMP (P2 repl. pump), J type: Water pump
SQA type: P1RPUMP (P1 repl. pump), J type: Water pump
P3CPUMP (P3 circulation pump)
P2CPUMP (P2 circulation pump)
P1CPUMP (P1 circulation pump)
SP5 Spare
SP6 Spare
SP7 Spare
SP8 Spare
PCFAN (Pump cooling fan)
EXFAN (Exhaust fan)
SP2 Spare
CONV (Conveyor motor)
CONVBK
SORT (Sorter motor)
SORTBK
BZ (Buzzer)
SP3 Spare
SP4 Spare
SP9 Spare
N. C.
P1JMOTCW (P1 J motor)
P1JMOTCWW
P2JMOTCW (P2 J motor)
P2JMOTCWW
P3JMOTCW (P3 J motor)
P3JMOTCWW
+5 V
+5 V
GND
GND

Remark

*1
Not used on J type.
Not used on J type.
Not used on J type.

Not used on SQA type.


Not used on SQA type.
Not used on SQA type.
Not used on SQA type.
Not used on SQA type.
Not used on SQA type.

*1: Used on J type of CE machine.

-76

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

Connector

RCN3 (MOLEX 5267-08A)

Function

Communication with Processor-CPU

No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

Pin assignment
MRRXD
MRTXD
MRRXD
RESET

RDRIVE
GND

Connector

RCN4 (MOLEX 5267-07A)

Function

Control signal with drive motor

No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7

Pin assignment

Remark

+5 V
FCLK
LOK
MODE
GND
+15 V
TRG

Connector

RCN5 (MOLEX 5277-06A)

Function

DC power supply

No.
1
2
3
4
5
6

Remark

Pin assignment

Remark

+5 V
GND
GND
+15 V
GA
-15 V

Connector

RCN6 (JAE PS-20PE-D4T1-B1)

Function

External expansion signal

No.

Pin assignment

Remark

-77

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

Connector

RCN7 (JAE PS-50PE-D4T1-M1) (On J type only)

Function

Temperature sensor input

No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50

Pin assignment

Remark

5V
5V
5V
5V
GND
GND
GND
GND

Spare
Spare

INSP1 Spare
INSP2 Spare
INSP3 Spare
JHOM1 Spare
JHOM2 Spare
JHOM3 Spare
JOPEN Spare
INSP4 Spare
INSP5 Spare
INSP6 Spare
INSP7 Spare
SP3
JSP4
REPDISP Spare
P1GLED
P1RLED
P2GLED
P2RLED
P3GLED
P3RLED
JSP1

P1JPOSS (P1-J position sensor 1)


P1JPLED (P1-J position sensor 1 LED)
P1JPOSS (P1-J position sensor 2)
P1JPLED (P1-J position sensor 2 LED)
P2JPOSS (P2-J position sensor 1)
P2JPLED (P2-J position sensor 1 LED)
P2JPOSS (P2-J position sensor 2)
P2JPLED (P2-J position sensor 2 LED)
P3JPOSS (P3-J position sensor 1)
P3JPLED (P3-J position sensor 1 LED)
P3JPOSS (P3-J position sensor 2)
P3JPLED (P3-J position sensor 2 LED)

-78

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

4. Switches and test mode


(1) SW1 (RESET)
This switch resets the CPU on this circuit board.
Pressing this switch makes the CPU restart the program from the beginning.
If there occurs something abnormal in the CPU such as its runaway, etc., press this switch.
After pressing this switch, press the operation switch to make a fresh start with operation mode.
(2) DSW1
Bit
1

Function

Setting

During test mode:


selecting of test item
During ordinary mode:
During single unit test mode:
possible of assigning functions

(all OFF set at factory)

Selecting of test mode

(all OFF set at factory)

Start of test

ON: test start


OFF: test stop (set at factory)

Executing of test mode

ON: test mode


OFF: ordinary mode (set at factory)

2
3
4
5
6

When the DSW1-8 has set to the OFF position, close the power breaker again.

-79

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

(3) Test mode and test method


1 Set DSW1-8 to the ON position.
(The test mode is activated, during this time when the normal operation is inhibited.)
2 Select the test mode.
DSW1 - 5

Bit

DSW1 - 6

Test item

OFF

OFF

Not used

ON

OFF

Output test 1

OFF

ON

Output test 2

ON

ON

Single unit test

The single unit test starts when DSW1-5, -6, -7 and -8 are set to the ON position.

3 Select a test item.


Select a test item and test condition for DSW1-1 to DSW1-4. (Refer to the FUNCTION
SELECT MAP.)
4 To start testing turn on DSW1-7.
If DSW1-1 through DSW1-4 are activated in the test operation, the test except the single unit
is stopped.
If DSW1-5 and DSW1-6 are activated in the test operation, the test is stopped.
5 To stop testing turn off DSW1-7.
6 To terminate the test mode, turn off DSW1-8. After selecting a function as needed, turn off the
power breaker at one time and turn it on again.

-80

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

FUNCTION SELECT MAP (For SQA type)


Output Test 1
No.
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F

DSW1 - 1

DSW1 - 2

DSW1 - 3

DSW1 - 4

OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON

OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON

OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON

OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON

DSW1 - 1

DSW1 - 2

DSW1 - 3

DSW1 - 4

OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF

OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON

OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON

OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF

Description
Drive motor test
Conveyor motor test
Conveyor sorter test
Exhaust fan test
Dryer/Dryer cooling fan test
P1 repl. pump test
P2 repl. pump test
P3 repl. pump test
P1 circulation pump test
P2 circulation pump test
P3 circulation pump test

Pump cooling fan test

P1 heater test (Completed in 10 sec.)*


P2 heater test (Completed in 10 sec.)*

* With level check

Output Test 2
No.
0
1
2
3
4
5
6

Description
P3 heater test (Completed in 10 sec.) *
DRY1 heater test (Completed in 10 sec.)**
DRY2 heater test (Completed in 10 sec.)**
MODE display test

Buzzer test

* With solution level check


** Dryer fan on together

-81

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

For single test


Setting of SW1 dip switches in single operation mode
DSW1
No.
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F

OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON

OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON

OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON

OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON

Paper width

Dry temperature

89 mm
127 mm
152 mm
203 mm
89 mm
127 mm
152 mm
203 mm
89 mm
89 mm
89 mm
89 mm
89 mm
89 mm
89 mm
89 mm

62.8C
62.8C
62.8C
62.8C
65.0C
65.0C
65.0C
65.0C
62.8C
62.8C
62.8C
62.8C
62.8C
62.8C
62.8C
62.8C

(4) Procedure of single unit test


(a) Setting of DSW1
1 Select test mode, and set DSW1-5 through DSW1-8 to the ON position to start testing.
2 Set paper width and dryer temperature according to the separate papers.
(Note: Specified values depend on the type of ROM.)
* If any of DSW1-5 to DSW1-8 is turned off in the test operation, all loads are canceled.
When testing in test mode again, repeat the operation 1 above.
3 To terminate the test mode.
Recover setting of DSW1 to normal mode. Turn off the power breaker at one time, and
then turn it on again.
When the dryer temperature is high, turn off DSW1-8 until the dryer fan continues ON
status for 5 minutes and then stops.

-82

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

(b) Setting values for the single unit test (setup temperature and refilling time for P1 through P3)

P1 Set temperature: 39.8C


P2 Set temperature: 36.8C
P3 Set temperature: 38.0C

P1 Replenisher volume: 79mL


P2 Replenisher volume: 99mL
P3 Replenisher volume: 197mL
Replenisher supply operation starts for approximately 0.984 m2 paper processed area.

P1 Replenishing cycle: Economizer tab starts for approximately 3.24 m2 paper processed
area
P2 Replenishing cycle: Economizer tab starts for approximately 1.62 m2 paper processed
area
P3 Replenishing cycle: Economizer tab starts for approximately 9.72 m2 paper processed
area
Note:
When paper is advanced by single unit operation, the paper length is measured and the
processed area is calculated at the outlet. At this time, replenishment area data and
replenishment count are set by the CPU. Therefore, when, after single unit testing, the
processor is connected to the printer, it needs to correct the stored data (or to clear the RAM
data).

(c) Control
1 Temperatures of P1 to DRY are controlled according to their setup temperatures.
2 The temperature control for P3 with the circulation pump ON is completed by the following
thermostat operation. (The circulation pump continues the ON condition for one minute after
the setup temperature has dropped by 1C, and the pump continues forced circulation for
30 minutes when the setup temperature has not dropped by 1C, during the period of
which the temperature control is not considered as having completed.
3 The cooler Sig is controlled according to the temperature set for P1 or P3.
ON: At temperature of more than 0.1C higher than for P1 or more than 0.4C higher than
for P3.
OFF: Below the temperature than the temperatures set for P1 and P3.

-83

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

5. Test pins
Test pin Designation
TP1
TP2
TP3
TP4
TP5
TP6
TP7
TP8
TP9
TP10
TP11
TP12
TP13
TP14
TP15
TP16
TP17
TP18
TP19
TP20
TP21
TP22
TP23
TP24
TP25
TP26
TP27
TP28
TP29
TP30
TP31

+5 V
GND
+15 V
-15 V

CLK
MODE
TRG
LOK
V2
V1
VOUT
VREF
1.5 V
RESET

GND
VBT

GA

Description
5V power supply checking terminal
Logic ground terminal
+15V power supply checking terminal
-15V power checking terminal
P1-J position sensor 1 checking terminal
P1-J position sensor 2 checking terminal
P2-J position sensor 1 checking terminal
P2-J position sensor 2 checking terminal
P3-J position sensor 1 checking terminal
P3-J position sensor 2 checking terminal
EXS1 outlet sensor 1 checking terminal
EXS2 outlet sensor 2 checking terminal
FCLK terminal
MODE terminal
TRG terminal
LOK terminal
Terminal at analog circuit input side
1.04V checking terminal
Terminal at analog circuit output side
Reference voltage(4.8V) checking terminal
1.5V checking terminal
Reset signal terminal
Open(used at factory)
Open(used at factory)
GND terminal
Battery power supply checking terminal
External reset terminal
MRTXD terminal
PBUSY terminal
MRTXD terminal
Analog ground terminal

-84

Remark

Not used on SQA type.


Not used on SQA type.
Not used on SQA type.
Not used on SQA type.
Not used on SQA type.
Not used on SQA type.

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

6. LEDs
(1) Description
Test pin Designation
LED1
LED2
LED3
LED4
LED5
LED6
LED7
LED8
LED9
LED10
LED11
LED12
LED13
LED14
LED15
LED16
LED17
LED18
LED19
LED20
LED21
LED22
LED23
LED24
LED25
LED26
LED27
LED28
LED29
LED30
LED31
LED32
LED33
LED34
LED35
LED36
LED37
LED38
LED39
LED40
LED41
LED42
LED43
LED44
LED45
LED46
LED47

RUN

Description

Remark

Indicates states such as mode, error. (7seg. LED)


On during CPU operation.
Lights up while P1 tank level is normal.
Lights up while P2 tank level is normal.
Lights up while P3-3 tank level is normal.
Lights up while water supply tank level is normal.
Lights up while P3-1 tank level is normal.
Lights up while overflow does not reach upper limit.
Turns on when overflow lower limit has been detected.
Turns on when sorter unit has been set.
Turns on when conveyor unit has been set.
Turns on when switching ECOJET tab ON.

Not used on SQA type.

Turns on when switching overflow transfer ON.


Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Turns on when temperature control tank cover has been set.
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used

TRG
MODE
LOK

Turns on when EXS2 paper has been detected.


Turns on when EXS1 paper has been detected.
Turns on when P3-J position sensor 2 has been lightproofed.
Turns on when P3-J position sensor 1 has been lightproofed.
Turns on when P2-J position sensor 2 has been lightproofed.
Turns on when P2-J position sensor 1 has been lightproofed.
Turns on when P1-J position sensor 2 has been lightproofed.
Turns on when P1-J position sensor 1 has been lightproofed.
Turns on when conveyor stop position 1 has been detected.
Turns on when sorter stop position has been detected.
Turns on when conveyor stop position 2 has been detected.
Turns on when motor drive position 2 has been detected.
Always goes off when motor speed has been changed.
Lights up while motor is normally running.

-85

Not used on SQA type.


Not used on SQA type.
Not used on SQA type.
Not used on SQA type.
Not used on SQA type.
Not used on SQA type.

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

(2) LED1 mode display


1) When no error occurs, the current condition is displayed.
CONDITION 1F
Blank

0
5

CONDITION 2F
COND. 1
COND. 2

1
2

Condition 1

Condition 2

Bit
ON

ON

OFF

OFF

Backup data

RAM initialization

Under replenishment

NO

OPERATE switch ON

OFF

Paper present

Paper absent

Temperature control

Inhibited

Operation mode in
cold climate

NO

Not used

P1 temp. control
completed

Not yet completed

Manual drive

OFF

P2 temp. control
completed

Not yet completed

Automatic drive

OFF

P3 temp. control
completed

Not yet completed

Dryer standby
completed

Not yet completed

Ready for processing

Impossible

Not used

Not used

2) When an error occurs, the error is displayed. (The error is indicated by 7-segment LED.)
Relation between error number and error indication: An error is displayed according to the
status data transmitted.
No.
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E

Error item
ROM
RAM
Communication

Processing tank level (P1 to P3)


Overflow

Abnormal temperature at the upper limit (P1 to P3 and DRY)


Abnormal temperature at the lower limit (P1 to P3 and DRY)
Abnormal warning temperature (P1 to P3 and DRY)
Jamming

-86

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

7. Variable resistors
VR

Designation

VR1
VR2
VR3
VR4
VR5
VR6
VR7
VR8
VR9
VR10
VR11
VR12
VR13
VR14
VR15
VR16

A
V2
P2
P3
DRY
VRG
VREF
P1JPOSS
P2JPOSS
P3JPOSS
P1JROTS
P2JROTS
P3JROTS
EXS1
EXS2
P1

Description

Remark

Amplifier gain adjustment


Bias voltage adjustment
P2 input adjustment
P3 input adjustment
DRY input adjustment
Bridge voltage adjustment
Reference voltage adjustment
P1 position sensor 1 voltage adjustment
P2 position sensor 1 voltage adjustment
P3 position sensor 1 voltage adjustment
P1 position sensor 2 voltage adjustment
P2 position sensor 2 voltage adjustment
P3 position sensor 2 voltage adjustment
EXS1 paper detection voltage adjustment
EXS2 paper detection voltage adjustment
P1 input adjustment

Not used on SQA type.


Not used on SQA type.
Not used on SQA type.
Not used on SQA type.
Not used on SQA type.
Not used on SQA type.

8. Adjustment
(1) Supply voltage check
Supply voltage

Measurement point

Measurement means

Rated voltage

+5 V

TP1 (+5 V) - TP2 (GND)

Digital voltmeter

+50.15 V

+15 V

TP3 (+15 V) - TP31 (GA)

Digital voltmeter

+150.3 V

-15 V

TP3 (+15 V) - TP31 (GA)

Digital voltmeter

-150.3 V

(2) A-D converter reference voltage adjustment


Adjustment

Supply
voltage

Measurement
means

Measurement point

VR

Rated
voltage

VRef

Digital voltmeter

TP20-TP31

VR7

4.8000.001 V

(3) Bridge voltage adjustment


Supply
voltage
VRG

Adjustment
Measurement point

VR

Measurement
means

TP21 (1.5 V) -TP31 (GA) VR6 (VRG) Digital voltmeter

-87

Rated
voltage

Measured
voltage

1.50.001 V

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

(4) Actual temperature adjustment


This adjustment should be conducted after the temperature control operation.
Compare the temperatures in the Mode-2-5-2 with actual solution temperatures of the processing
tanks, and adjust the displayed temperature according to the following table.
Reference

Setup
Displayed
Actual solution Difference (3)
temperature temperature (1) temperature (2)
(2) - (1)

Standard
difference

Adjusting
VR

P1

39.8C

0.3C

VR16

P2

36.8C

0.4C

VR3

P3

38.0C

0.4C

VR4

(5) Outlet sensor output voltage adjustment

Supply
voltage

Adjustment

Measurement
means

Measurement point

VR

Rated
voltage

EXS1 (without paper)

Digital voltmeter

TP11-TP2

VR14

Higher than 3.00 V

EXS1 (with paper*)

Digital voltmeter

TP11-TP2

VR14

Lower than 1.00 V

EXS2 (without paper)

Digital voltmeter

TP12-TP2

VR15

Higher than 3.00 V

EXS2 (with paper*)

Digital voltmeter

TP12-TP2

VR15

lower than 1.00 V

* The sensor is located in the outlet of the printer processor.

9. Dip SW

[PP-8610EB/TB]
Board name

Setting

PROCESSOR
-CPU board

1
DSW1 :

Remarks
5

OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF

SQA
type

[PP-8611B/UB/TB]
Board name

Setting

PROCESSOR
-CPU board

1
DSW1 :

OFF ON

3
ON

Remarks
5

J type

ON OFF OFF OFF OFF

-88

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

3-27. Processor-Drive (3850H1510)


1. Outline and external view
(1) External view

(2) Size
270 mm x 115 mm x approx. 40 mm
(Six board mounting holes provided.)
(3) Functions
Output control: Output is controlled according to the serial data from the PROCESSOR-CPU.
Output system: 5 VDC (buzzer use), 1 channel
24 VDC, 13 channels
100 VAC, 8 channels
200 VAC, 2 channels

2. Power supply
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)

+5 V, 1 A (max.)
+24 V, 1 A (max.)
100 VAC, 5 A (max.)
200 VAC (out of service)

-89

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

3. Connectors
Connector

DCN1 (JAE PS-40PE-D4T1-M1)

Function

External extension signal

No.

Pin assignment

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40

DRYH2 (DRY Heater 2)


DRYH1 (DRY Heater 1)
P3H (P3 Heater)
DRFAN/CLFAN (Dryer Fan/Cooling Fan)
P2H (P2 Heater)
P1H (P1 Heater)
OVRPUMP (Overflow Transfer Pump)
SP1 Spare
SQA type: P3RPUMP (P3 repl. Pump) / J type: Water pump
SQA type: P2RPUMP (P2 repl. Pump) / J type: Water pump
SQA type: P1RPUMP (P1 repl. Pump) / J type: Water pump
P3CPUMP (P3 Circulation Pump)
P2CPUMP (P2 Circulation Pump)
P1CPUMP (P1 Circulation Pump)
SP5 Spare
SP6 Spare
SP7 Spare
N. C.
PCFAN (Pump Cooling Fan)
EXFAN (Exhaust Fan)
SP2 Spare
CONV (Conveyor Motor)
CONVBK
SORT (Sorter Motor)
SORTBK
BZ (Buzzer)
N. C.
N. C.
N. C.
N. C.
P1JMOTCW
P1JMOTCCW
P2JMOTCW
P2JMOTCCW
P3JMOTCW
P3JMOTCCW
+5 V
+5 V
GND
GND

Remark

-90

Used on J type of CE machine.

Not used on SQA type.


Not used on SQA type.
Not used on SQA type.
Not used on SQA type.
Not used on SQA type.
Not used on SQA type.

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

Connector

DCN2 (MOLEX 5285-03A)

Function

Heater drive

No.
1
2
3

Pin assignment
N. C.
N. C.
N. C.

Connector

DCN3 (MOLEX 5267-06A)

Function

DRY heater, P3 heater control signal output

No.
1
2
3
4
5
6

Pin assignment

DCN4 (MOLEX 5277-04A)

Function

+24 V power supply

No.

Pin assignment

Remark

+24 V-1
+24 V-2
0V
0V

Connector

DCN5 (MOLEX 5566-14A)

Function

+24 V system drive

No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14

Remark

+5 V
DRY HEATER 2
DRY HEATER 1
P3 HEATER
DRY FAN / CL FAN
P1 HEATER

Connector

1
2
3
4

Remark

Pin assignment

Remark

+24 V
+EXHAUST FAN
+24 V
+COOLING FAN
+24 V
+PUMP COOLING FAN
+CONVEYOR MOTOR
- CONVEYOR MOTOR
+SORTER MOTOR
- SORTER MOTOR
SP2+ (Spare)
SP2- (Spare)
+5 V
+BZ

-91

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

Connector

DCN6 (MOLEX 5281-02A)

Function

200 VAC power supply

No.
1
2

Pin assignment
N. C.
N. C.

Connector

DCN7 (MOLEX 5566-06A)

Function

100 VAC power supply

No.
1
2
3
4
5
6

Pin assignment

DCN8 (JMOLEX 5566-04A)

Function

100 VAC system drive

No.

Pin assignment

DCN9 (MOLEX 5566-04A)

Function

100 VAC system drive

No.

Pin assignment

DCN10 (MOLEX 5566-04A)

Function

100 VAC system drive

1
2
3
4

Remark

P2 CIRCULATION PUMP
100 VAC 2
FG
N. C.

Connector

No.

Remark

P1 CIRCULATION PUMP
100 VAC 2
FG
N. C.

Connector

1
2
3
4

Remark

100 VAC 1
100 VAC 1
N. C.
100 VAC 2
100 VAC 2
N. C.

Connector

1
2
3
4

Remark

Pin assignment

Remark

P3-1 CIRCULATION PUMP


100 VAC 2
FG
N. C.

-92

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

Connector

DCN11 (MOLEX 5566-04A)

Function

100 VAC system drive

No.
1
2
3
4

Pin assignment
P3-2 CIRCULATION PUMP
100 VAC 2
FG
N. C.

Connector

DCN12 (MOLEX 5566-04A)

Function

100 VAC system drive

No.
1
2
3
4

Pin assignment

DCN13 (MOLEX 5566-04A)

Function

100 VAC system drive

No.

Pin assignment

DCN14 (MOLEX 5566-04A)

Function

100 VAC system drive

No.

Pin assignment

DCN15 (MOLEX 5566-04A)

Function

100 VAC system drive

1
2
3
4

Remark

SQA type: P2 REPL. PUMP / J type: Water pump


100 VAC 2
FG
N. C.

Connector

No.

Remark

SQA type: P1 REPL. PUMP / J type: Water pump


100 VAC 2
FG
N. C.

Connector

1
2
3
4

Remark

P3-3 CIRCULATION PUMP


100 VAC 2
FG
N. C.

Connector

1
2
3
4

Remark

Pin assignment

Remark

SQA type: P3 REPL. PUMP / J type: Water pump


100 VAC 2
FG
N. C.

-93

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

4. LEDs
LED

Designation

LED1
LED2
LED3
LED4
LED5
LED6
LED7
LED8
LED9
LED10
LED11
LED12
LED13
LED14
LED17
LED18
LED19
LED26
LED27
LED28
LED29

P1CPUMP
P2CPUMP
P3CPUMP
P1REPL.
P2REPL.
P3REPL.
OVRPUMP
SP1
P1H
P2H
DRFAN, CLFAN
P3H
DRYH1
DRYH2
PCFAN
EXFAN
SP2
SP5
SP6
SP7
24 V-1

Description

Remark

Lights up when P1 circulation pump starts operating.


Lights up when P2 circulation pump starts operating.
Lights up when P3 circulation pump starts operating.
SQA type: Lights up when P1 repl. pump starts operating, J type: Water pump
SQA type: Lights up when P2 repl. pump starts operating, J type: Water pump
SQA type: Lights up when P3 repl. pump starts operating, J type: Water pump
Lights up when the overflow transfer pump starts running.
Spare
Lights up when P1 heater starts operating.
Lights up when P2 heater starts operating.
Lights up when the dryer fan and cooling fan start operating.
Lights up when P3 heater is in operation.
Lights up when DRY heater 1 starts operating.
Lights up when DRY heater 2 starts operating.
Lights up when the pump cooling fan starts operating.
Lights up when the exhaust fan start operating.
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
For 24 V power supply operation confirmation.

Used on J type of CE machine.

5. Buzzer sound (VR1) adjustment


When buzzer cannot be heard, correct the VR1 to the proper position, with the buzzer being ready for
sounding by use of the test mode, etc.

Fuses (PROCESSOR-DRIVE Board)


The fuses used are listed in the following tables.
Using fuses of different type and rating may damage the units due to overload or shortcircuit.

No.

Model

F1

2183.15

Ritel Fuse

250 V, 3.15 A

P1&P2 circulation pumps

F2

2183.15

Ritel Fuse

250 V, 3.15 A

P3 circulation pumps

F3

2183.15

Ritel Fuse

250 V, 3.15 A

P1 to P3 repl. pumps

Manufacturer

Rating

-94

Load

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

4. CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
4-1. BLOCK DIAGRAM
DS-1000U/DS-100T/DS-1000 HARDWARE BLOCK DIAGRAM

-1

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

DP-1000E/DP-1000 HARDWARE BLOCK DIAGRAM

-2

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

4-2. WIRING DIAGRAM


DS-1000/DS-1000U (1/2)

-3

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

DS-1000/DS-1000U (2/2)

-4

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

DS-1000T (1/2)

-5

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

DS-1000T (2/2)

-6

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

240AFC

-7

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

UNIVERSAL CARRIER

-8

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

PRINTER (1/6)

-9

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

PRINTER (2/6)

-10

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

PRINTER (3/6)

-11

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

PRINTER (4/6)

-12

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

PRINTER (5/6)

-13

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

PRINTER (6/6)

-14

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

5. EXPLANATION OF POWER SUPPLY UNIT


5-1. Input station
SUP1

SUP2

Type

LEB225F-0524-SYN

LDA15F-15SN

Maker

COSEL

COSEL

Function

5V

24V

15V

CCD unit control ( logical)

CCD unit drive

CCD unit analogue section

AFC-CPU board control ( logical)

Motor ( transport, APS cartridge)

Film carrier film sensor

Scanner drive board control

Solenoid ( LLD,F/P)

Film carrier APS magnetic detection

(logical)

Clutch

Power supply for sensors ( photo


interrupter, micro sw)

LED light source


Cooling fan

5-2. Printer Processor


SUP1

SUP2

SUP3

SUP4

SUP5

Type

LEA50F-5-RY

LEA50F-3R3-RY

LEB225F-0524-R

LDA30F-12

LEA100F-24-H

Maker

COSEL

COSEL

COSEL

COSEL

COSEL

5V5V-1

3.3V

12V

24V(24V-2)

Function

[Remote control
function]

5V(5V-2)

[Remote control
function]

HEAD-BUF board
control
PRINTER-CPU board
Sub-drive unit control Power supply of LED
control
Exposure transport
exposure head
Power supply board of
section control
VFPH
Paper feed unit
PROCESSOR CPU
control
board control
Double magazine
control

-1

24V(24V-1)

[Remote control
function]

Creating 36V with


SUP5(24V)

Motor power supply at Paper processor drive


Sub-drive unit
motor
Motor power supply at Double magazine
Exposure transport
motor
section
Motor power supply at
Paper feed unit
Motor power supply at
double magazine

Creating 36V with


SUP4(12V)
36V
Paper processor drive
motor
Double magazine
motor
24V
DC motor power
supply at Paper
processor
Exhaust fan, vacuum
fan

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

5-3. SUP1: Check procedures against a case where 5-volt power is not output
SUP is a power supply provided with a remote-control function.
Even if 5-volt power is not output from SUP1, it does not necessarily indicate a failure.
Be sure to troubleshoot by the steps shown in the following flow:

1 Turn on the breaker.

2 Check that 5-volt output appears across


CN2-3, 4 (+) and 1,2 (-) on SUP1.

Start

Check output of
SUP power
supply.

YES
Normal

NO

3 3. Turn off the breaker, and remove CN2 from


SUP1. Turn on the breaker, and check
that 5-volt output appears across CN2-3, 4 (+)
and 1,2 (-) on SUP1 with the connector open.

Check output with


connector open.

YES

Fault such as short-circuit


caused by overloading is
suspected.
Check wiring.

NO

4 Turn off the breaker, and connect CN2 on


SUP1. Turn on the breaker, and check
that 5-volt output appears across CN3-1 (+)
and 2 (-) on SUP1.

Check remote
control signal (1).

YES
Fault of power supply is
suspected.

NO

5 Check that 5-volt output appears across


CN(+) to 6 (-) on PPCN11-2 of PRINTER-CPU
board.

Check remote
control signal (2).

YES

NO

6 Check that 5-volt DC output appears on


PPCN11-2 of PRINTER, across TP1 (5V) and
TP2 (GND).

Input on PRINTERCPU board.

YES

1 Harness between PPCN 11


on Printer-CPU board and
PSCN6 on power supply
unit and power supply unit
on PRINTER-CPU board.
2 Harness between PSCN8
and AUP1-3 in power
supply unit.
Faulty harness or
disconnection of connector in
one of the above is suspected.
Fault of PRINTER-CPU board is
suspected. Replace the board
with new one.

NO

5-volt power is not output


from SUP3 power supply.
Check SUP3 or cables
coming from SUP3.
Replace SUP3 or the cables
if necessary.

End

Note
Note: Reference voltage: 5V, plus or minus 0.25V Go to "Yes" if a voltage is within the range.
Go to "No" if a voltage is range.

-2

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

6. MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION OF INPUT SECTION (DS-1000U/T)


IMPORTANT:
Turn off all power sources.
When unplugging the power cord, make sure that the power has been
completely turned off, and remove the plug from the socket by pulling on the
plug connector section, not the power cable. (Use the same method for
plugging in the unit)
Before removing circuit boards, switches or sensors in the system, discharge
static electricity from your body by touching other metal part of the system.
When adjusting a board or a replacing a power supply unit, use a ceramic
screwdriver. Do not use a metal screwdriver.

6-1. Air filter


6-1-1. Cleaning air filter (Monthly operation)
1 Remove air filters a and b (two sections each of air intake and exhaust) of the light source
section and remove also the side c of the film scanner main unit.
2 Wash the removed air filters in water, dry them completely, and then install them.
NOTE
- Install the right and left air filters of the light source section b with the coarsely meshed side
outward.

c
b

-1

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

6-2. Light source


6-2-1. Cleaning dichroic mirror (Every three month)

1 Open the front cover at the lower part of Film


Scanner.

2 Completely loosen both 1. Pull the green


handle forward, and guide the light source by
hand when removing.
3 Loosen 2.
Rotate 3 90.
Completely loosen both 4.
Push the light source cover a inwards and
remove it.
NOTE

2 Diffusion film (upper)


a

- Be careful for the diffusion film (upper) not to


slip down in removing the lamp unit cover.
4

4 Loosen 5.
Slide 6 in the "FREE" direction.
Pull 7 diagonally upwards and remove it.
5 Wipe the dichroic mirror b with a dry soft lint
free cloth.

NOTE
7

Use of water or alcohol when cleaning may


result in spotting. This will adversely affect
image quality.
6 Install the removed components exactly as
before.

-2

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

6-2-2. Replacing diffusion film (upper) (Replace it as needed)

1 Open the font cover at the lower part of Film


Scanner.

2 Completely loosen both screw 1.


Pull the green handle forward, and guide the
light source by hand when removing.
3 Loosen screw 2.
Turn 3 90, and remove the dispersion film a.
4 Insert the new dispersion film with the cut side
facing left (smooth side facing up).
5 Install the removed components exactly as
before.

NOTE

Insert direction
Cut side

- Set the diffusion film with its notch


being fit to the notch on the
mounting side.
(The diffusion film should be
placed with the smooth surface
upward.)

Cut side
a
Diffusion film
Remove direction

-3

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

6-2-3. Cleaning diffusion film (lower) (Monthly operation)

1 Remove the lamp unit cover according to steps


1 through 3 of the procedure explained in "62-1. Cleaning dichroic mirror."

2 Remove two screws a and remove light-guide


assembly b.

3 Remove two screws c of light guide assembly,


and remove lower cover d.

NOTE
- Keep it clean and do not drop since a prism
is incorporated in the unit.
4 Remove the diffusion film (lower) e, clean it
with the dry cloth specified by Konica, or
replace it as needed.
5 Install the removed components exactly as
before.

NOTE
- Fit the notch in the diffusion film to the notch
in the lower cover.
(The diffusion film should be placed with the
rough surface upward.)
Cut side
Diffusion film
Cut side

Lower cover d

-4

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

6-2-4 Replacing LS-LED B and LS-LED A boards

Spacer

POINT
- A warning message is displayed when LED
needs to be replaced because the light is
dim. Replace the LED when the warning
message is displayed. Clean the LED
surface with a blower brush, or the like every
6 months (rough standard) until the message
is displayed.

Bottom side : LS-LED B board (Red, Green, Ir)

IMPORTANT
Side: LS-LED A board. (Blue)
- After replacing LS-LED A/B board, perform the
setup with all film carriers being selected.
[Replacing LS-LED B board]
1 Remove the dichroic mirror according to steps
1 through 4 of the procedure explained in "62-1. Cleaning dichroic mirror."
Remove the light guide assembly according to
steps 1 and 2 of the procedure explained in
"6-2-3. Cleaning diffusion film (lower)."
2 Remove screws a on side of light source (one
on left and right each, two screws in total), and
then remove cover b.

3 Remove the two screws c from the bottom of


the lamp unit, and remove the LS-LED board B
d together with the base bracket.
4 Remove connector (LSCN 2) e that is
connected to the board.
5 Remove the four screws f to remove the LSLED board B from the base bracket, and
replace the LS-LED board.

e
d

NOTE
- A spacer is placed between the base bracket
and the LS-LED board. Be careful not to drop
or lose the spacer.
6 Install the removed components exactly as
before.

IMPORTANT
- Note that LS-LED B can be mounted upside down, which is wrong orientation.
- When installing the LS-LED board B, left-adjust it in the state in which the stamp on it is at the
normal position (with the connector on the front), and secure it.

-5

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

[Replacing LS-LED A board]


1 Remove the dichroic mirror according to steps
1 through 4 of the procedure explained in "62-1. Cleaning dichroic mirror."
Remove the light guide assembly according to
steps 1 and 2 of the procedure explained in
"6-2-3. Cleaning diffusion film (lower)."

2 Like when replacing the LS-LED board B,


remove the two screws g from the bottom of
the lamp unit, and remove the LS-LED board A
h together with the base bracket.
3 Remove connector (LSCN 1) that is connected
to the board.
4 Remove four screws, and then remove LS-LED
A board to replace the component.
NOTE
h
- A spacer is placed between the base bracket
and the LS-LED board. Be careful not to
drop or lose the spacer.
5 Install the removed components exactly as
before.

NOTE
- Make sure of the orientation of the LS-LED board when installing it on the base bracket.
(Be careful that the board can be installed upside-down from the correct orientation.)

-6

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

6-3. Film Scanner


[Preparation]
1. Remove the AFC and 135 film stocker from the film scanner.
2. Remove the film scanner from the table, and place it on a level, hard table.
6-3-1. Replacing scanning section
(Required tools)
Stabilized screwdriver, general Phillips screwdriver, and long Phillips screwdriver
NOTE
- Shut down the input station, turn off the film scanner, disconnect the AC cord and wiring, and
then start the operation below.
1 Remove screw a (M4 x 14 SEMS 2, one
screw) under the front cover and remove the
front cover b.
(Tool: Stabilized screwdriver)

2 Remove six screws c (Truss M4 x 8). Remove the right top cover by lifting the bottom.

-7

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

3 Remove six screws d (Truss M4 x 8). Remove the left top cover.

4 Remove connectors e (J1, J4, IEEE1394) at


the rear of scanning section.

-8

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

5 Replace image capture unit by following steps.


(1) Remove three screws f.
(2) Disconnect the connector JP11 g.
(3) Slowly lift and pull out the image capture
unit straight.
NOTE
- In case of shims (spacers) are on screw hole,
be careful not to drop or lose any of them in
lifting the image pickup unit.
(4) Place the shims (spacers) one on top of
another neatly on the corresponding screw
hole. (The same number of shims must be
placed on the same screw hole as before.)
(5) Take out the new image pickup unit, and
remove the silica gel that is taped on it.
* Hold the flange (where the mounting
screws exist) of the image capture unit
when taking it out.
(6) Securely set the new image capture unit
while paying attention to the positioning
pins h.
(7) Tighten the screws you removed in (1).

A
f

NOTE
- Notes on handling the image capture unit:
Keep the following in mind when placing the image capture unit alone: In consideration of the
breakage prevention and safety of the lens and filter, put the image capture unit on a level place
with the surface A (indicated in the above figure) downward. Do not touch the lens. Do not give
shock to the image capture unit.
(8) Connect the connectors (J1, J4, IEEE1394, and J11).
The connector IEEE1394 must be connected to J6 (upper).
(9) Turn on the power and perform adjustment, following the image scanner replacement
procedures given in the next pages onward.
6 Installing the covers and placing the film scanner
(1) Install the upper left cover with the six screws (Truss M4 x 8) .
(2) Install the upper right cover with the six screws (Truss M4 x 8) .
(3) Install the front cover with the screw (M4 x 14 SEMS 2) .
(4) Place the film scanner on the system table, and align their surfaces with each other.
(5) Install the AFC and 135 film stocker.
(6) Wire the image capture unit exactly as before you removed, and then turn on the power.
IMPORTANT
- When replacing the image capture unit, confirm the versions of the film scanner and the zoom
lens, and update them to the latest versions as needed.

-9

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

Procedures of replacing image scanning sections


List of adjustment items upon replacement of image scanning section
No.

Description

Tool used

Page number Remarks


-10

1 Updating film scanner driver


2 Adjusting scanner focus

PPCS

-11

3 S/N number check list

Unit number check sheet

-13

4 Light source unit check

ScantestRD1.exe(120-compatible)

-15

*1

-20

*2

-23

*3

5 Main scanning position check


6

Sub scanning direction optical


axis check

Check chart film and analysis, Analysis


software setup file, Software (gst_chk_old.exe)

*1

*1: Some procedures are required only when UFC is used.


*2: Required when 135AFC, 240AFC (option), UFC (option) are used.
*3: Required only when UFC is used.
Detailed procedures
1
Updating film scanner driver
Administrators log-in is required for the procedures.
Procedures
1) Press [Ctrl]+[Alt]+[Del] keys to display "Windows security" screen.
2) Press "Log off."
3) On the log-on screen, enter the following information:
User name: Administrator
Password: blank
Then press "OK"
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

!0
!1
!2
!3

Right-click on "My Computer" icon of desktop to open "Property."


Click "Device Manager" in "Hardware" tab.
Click "+" symbol on "DRS Protocol Device" tree to display "MFS Film Scanner."
Open property of "MFS Film Scanner."
Click "Update Driver" button on "Driver" tab.
On a dialog, click "Next."
Select "Display a list of the known drivers for this device so that I can choose a specific
driver"and click "Next."
Click "Have Disk" button.
Click "Browse" and select:
C:Program Filesrsystemr1vupRSCANDRIVERMFS.inf
Then click "Open" and "OK."
Click "Next."
"Start installation" is displayed. Click "Next."
Click "Finish."
After finishing, open property of "MFS Film Scanner," and click "Driver" tab. Verify that
its version number is "0.21.2.0" or 1.0.0.0."

The following procedures are all applicable to r1 user.


Log out of the system and then log in as r1 again.
User name: r1
Password: konica
Phoenix automatically starts up and displays home screen.

-10

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

2
Scanner focus adjustment procedures

[Required tool]
PPCS negative film (a frame of under exposure is used)
Perform scanner focus adjustment using a negative film.
Use a negative film free from strong curl, severe damages, or buckling.
(1) On 135AFC / 240AFC
1 Mount a carrier to set up.
2 Select Home Maintenance 22.Film scanner 222.adjust focus.
3 From underneath insert a slope scanning PPCS negative film for height adjustment.
Pre-scanning is automatically executed and the first several frames are displayed on
screen.
4 Select darkest density image and drag the image scanning position setting line (yellow
vertical line) to left or right, so that the line comes at the center of a figure in PPCS.

carrier type

mask type

discharge

register

auto start

5 Pressing "auto start" button starts automatic adjustment of focus position.


Upon completion of calculation, the value appears in "New height adjustment value" field.
6 Press "regist" button to register, and eject film with the "discharge" button.

-11

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

(2) On Universal carrier (Perform only when Universal carrier is used).


1 Mount a mask for Universal carrier to be adjusted.
- The focus adjustment mode adjusts focus for each carrier and each mask type.
However, 120 masks including 6-by-6 and 6-by-7 are all recognized as 120 masks.
Register only one mask for 120 mask of the shop.
On the UFC focus adjustment screen, the software detects 5 types of masks, 135, 110,
120, 240, and mount.
- Adjust the mount mask using a typical mount. Focus adjustment is allowed by clicking
"AF Ctl" button that appears upon setting a mount mask.
2 Select Home Maintenance 22.Film scanner 222.adjust focus
3 Press "Move to home" button to detect a mask type. Check that a mask type specified
in "Mask type".
4 Set a film for scanner focus adjustment(PPCS) and execute pre-scanning with
"Pre scanning" button.
5 Drag the image scanning position setting line (yellow vertical line) to left or right so that the
line comes at the center of a figure in PPCS.
6 Pressing "auto start" button starts automatic adjustment of focus position.
Upon completion of calculation, the value appears in "New height adjustment value" field.
7 Press "regist" button to register, and then take out the film.
pre scanning

auto start

regist
move to home

-12

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

3
S/N number check list
Check and record the items that were modified.
<Unit number check sheet> Machine number: (

(1) Input station unit


No.

Unit name

Serial number
Early

Replace 1

Replace 2

Main unit
1

Image scanning section

AFC-CPU Board

DC-TRM Board

ScannerDriving Board

Power supply unit


1

SUP1

SUP2

Light source unit


1

Light source unit

LS-LED-A Board

LS-LED-B Board

PC unit
1

PC unit

Extended keyboard

Flatbed scanner

HUB

CRT

Other
1

Film cleaner

-13

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

(2) 135AFC
No.

Unit name

Serial number
Early

Replace 1

Replace 2

135AFC
1

135 AFC unit

PD-AMP Board

(3) 240AFC
No.

Unit name

Serial number
Early

Replace 1

Replace 2

240AFC
1

240AFC unit

PD-AMP Board

MAG-AMP Board

(3) Universal carrier


No.

Unit name

Serial number
Early

Replace 1

Replace 2

Universal carrier
1

Universal carrier

-14

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

4
Checking light source unit
(1) Measuring light-source output
By the following procedures, perform automatic light adjustment and record the light
adjustment value.
1 Mount 135AFC on the scanner unit.
2 Select "Maintenance" - "21 film carrier" - "213 Set light source" and press [Morning setup].
Then press [Start] to start processing.
3 After completion of the morning setup, click [Quit].
4 Press [Previous] to close the current screen. Then press [213 Set light source] again to
activate the light-source setting mode.
5 Click [Light source setting] - [Scan] to display graph.
6 Adjust PWMB values so that MAX displays for B, G, R, and IR are 57000 (87%) to 61000
(93%). (If adjustment is impossible, specify 0 ->1 for PWMA.) Repeat pressing [Set light
source] and [Scan] to display graph.
Guideline for adjustment
- Setting range of PWMB is 0 to 255. Setting values and signal levels are in a direct
proportional relationship.
- Setting range of PWMA is 0 to 1. PWMA=1 specifies a level twice as high as a level at
PWMA=0.
That is: Signal levels change in proportion to ([PWMA setting value] + 1) x [PWMB setting
value].
- First, set PWMA=0 and perform adjustment by PWMB values as much as possible.
Example: Increase PWMB by 10% to increase MAX value by 10%.
- If a signal level is insufficient at PWMB=255, set PWMA=1.
Example: To increase signal level by 30% at PWMA=0/PWMB=220, specify
PWMA=1/PWMB=143 (calculated as: 220 x 1.3 = 286 = 2 x 143).
- If a desired level is not obtained at PWMA=1 and PWMB=255, collect data at PWMA=1
and PWMB=255 and record a maximum value under that setting.
- If the light source is saturated (State where the graph forms a straight line at 100%),
saturation level is unknown. Specify PWMB at 1/2 temporarily.
7 Record PWMA and PWMB values after light adjustment.

Measurement

PWM A

value (entry)

PWM B

IR

0 or 1

0 or 1

0 or 1

0 or 1

5
7

2
8

8 Click "Home" to return to the home screen. Do not click "Registraion."

-15

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

(2) Measuring flatness (only when mask for 120 is used on UFC)
Quit R1 application (Phenix.exe) if it has been activated.
The mask for 120 mounted, load UFC on the film scanner.
Insert a specified floppy disk, and activate ScantestRD1.exe in the ScantestRD1_120 folder.

1 2

5
1
2
3
4
5

Press [Init].
Press [Connect].
Select size 6*4.5H and press [Setup].
Select Is zero.
Press [Control]. Enters Lamp Control screen.

After the commands are issued, status display such as "XXX OK" appears at the upper-left
corner of the window.
If a display such as "XXX Failure" appears, select Disconnect Exit Quit to close the
software and press the reset button (a white button in the hole located at the bottom-right corner
on the front panel of the image scanner), or turn off and on the power of the scanner. Then restart
the process with activation of ScantestRD1.EXE.

-16

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

6 Select Blue and verify that data is set as: DAC1: 3, DAC2: 63, DAC3: 31, DAC4 (all of
DAC4-1 through 16): 63, PWMCLK:36, PWM BLANK:1.
Set the results of automatic light adjustment (PWMA and PWMB) in PWMALL and PWM.
(PWMALL PWMAPWM PWM)
7 Similarly for G/R/IR, verify that data is set as: DAC1: 3, DAC2: 63, DAC3: 31, DAC4 (all of
DAC4-1 through 16): 63, PWMCLK: 36, PWM BLANK: 1. Set the result of automatic light
adjustment (PWMA and PWMB) in PWMALL and PWM. (PWMALL PWMA
PWM PWM)
Select [OK] to turn on the LED of light source. (LED is turned on after corrected data is
written on FD.)
8 The system returns to the Scantest for RD1 screen. Verify that [Shutter] button is pressed
down. If it is not pressed down, press [Shutter] button.
A pressed-down [Shutter] button indicates that the Shutter is open. Otherwise, output
cannot be verified. An open shutter allows continuous light to CCD, causing degradation
of CCD. Avoid long interruption of operation under this condition.
9 Press [Graph] to open Lamp level map screen.

-17

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

100%
80%
60%
40%
20%
0%

!0
Air PWM (37h)
Air area

!0 PressScan. Verify that the maximum values for R, G, and B are approximately 90%
to 80%. If the light is saturating (State where the graph forms a straight line at 100%) or
below 80%, adjust Pwm B and Pwm A values of
applicable channels for Lamp level map Air area, press [Air PWM(37h)], and then press
[Scan] again. (Repeat the process until a maximum value becomes 90 to 80.
Guideline for adjustment
- Setting range of PWMB is 0 to 255. Setting values and signal levels are in a direct
proportional relationship.
- Setting range of PWMA is 0 to 1. PWMA=1 specifies a level twice as high as a level at
PWMA=0.
That is: Signal levels change in proportion to ([PWMA setting value] + 1) x [PWMB setting
value].
- First, set PWMA=0 and perform adjustment by PWMB values as much as possible.
Example: Increase PWMB by 10% to increase MAX value by 10%.
- If a signal level is insufficient at PWMB=255, set PWMA=1.
Example: To increase signal level by 30% at PWMA=0/PWMB=220, specify
PWMA=1/PWMB=143 (calculated as: 220 x 1.3 = 286 = 2 x 143).
- If a desired level is not obtained at PWMA=1 and PWMB=255, collect data at PWMA=1
and PWMB=255 and record a maximum value under that setting.
- If the light source is saturated (State where the graph forms a straight line at 100%) ,
saturation level is unknown. Specify PWMB at 1/2 temporarily.

-18

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

!1 The graph initially displays RGB only. For IR, therefore, verification is required also (select
IR).
!2 Press [????] to close Lamp level map to return to main screen.
!3 Press [Create] to scan profile data of light source.
!4 Press [Save] to save data. File name is yymmdd_SN(.shd), and saving destination is a
floppy disk.
"yymmdd" is a current date and SN is a serial number of the film scanner.
!5 SelectDISCONNECTEXITQUITto terminate ScanTsetRD1.

-19

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

5Film Scanner Scanning Position Adjustment (Main Direction)


When the image capture unit is replaced to new one, the scanning position adjustment is taken
during the replacement.
All film carriers are adjusted individually.
Do not change the scanning condition values because values are set at the factory.
(1) Preparation: Film scanner setup
From Home: "Setup" "12 Individual Setting" "122 Film scanner setup"
Before scanner position adjustment, the film scanner setup is taken for all film carriers.
(2) Scanner position adjustment procedure
1 Set film carrier to film scanner
Note; Take out any filmstrip in the carrier
Note; In case of UFC, proceed below procedure too
a) Set UFC with 135 film mask to film scanner and click "Film mask initialize".
b) Click "Yes", when the message comes on the screen.
c) Move the center of the mask to scanning position after the mask is back to home
position.
2 From Home "Maintenance" "21 Film Carrier" "213 Set light source"
3 Click "Main Scan Calculation"

"Main Scan Calculation" button

-20

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

If scanning condition is different form below table, change the value to initial value and
click "Set".
Item
Zoom No.
Threshold Value
Main Scanning Pixel
Sub Scanning Pixel

Initial Value
86
0.60
5340
500

4 Click "Calculation"
Try 2 or 3 times up to the lines are flat in the graph.

"Calculation" button

"Registration" button
5 Click "Registration".
6 Click "Home".
7 Confirmation of Registration
From Home "Maintenance" "21 Film Carrier" "211 Set feed"
Confirm the main scanning shifts value.

Main scanning shifts value

8 Click "Home".

-21

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

6Checking the optical axis in the sub-scan direction (only when UFC is used)
1. Purpose
The purpose of this checking is to match the optical axes of the projection section so that the
occurrence of ghosting is reduced.
2. Items to be prepared
Universal carrier (UFC), 135 film mask (for UFC)
Inspection chart film
Floppy disk (FD) containing data analysis software (gst_chk.exe)
Check sheet (calculation sheet)
3. Outline of the procedure
Prepare carrier
Clean main unit and film carrier

(3 minutes)

Set up scanner

(4 minutes)

Project inspection chart film


(set reversal film)
(2 minutes)

Set 6 x 8
Judge with data analysis software
Adjust using shims if NG

End if OK
(5 minutes)

4. Details of the procedure


1 Preparing a universal carrier (UFC)
Prepare UFC and a 135-film mask and set it in the scanner main unit.
2 Cleaning the main unit and carrier
Clean the top of the light source diffusion panel of the input section and the slit section of
the UFC with a blower brush.
3 Setting up a scanner
After starting Phenix.exe, select [Setup][12 Individual setup][122 Film scanner setup]
from the home screen. Check "UFC" in the carrier used field and click on [Start setup].
Setup takes about 2 to 3 minutes.

-22

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

4 Projecting an inspection chart


4-1 Specify 'positive' for the film type and '6 x 8' for the print size.
Click "No Print" button.
4-2 Increment the Sort No. by one and record the Sort No. Set the inspection chart film in
the 135-film mask and scan the film.
(Images of inspection film are all the same. Do not use the heavy curled film or the
scratched image.)
4-3 Click "Print" button.
5 Analyzing data and adjusting the projection section by inserting shims
For adjustment, shim (spacer) is required separately.
270001062B Spacer (0.1 mm)
270001070A Spacer (0.2 mm)
270001071A Spacer (0.5 mm)
5-1 Set the FD containing analysis software in the PC. Check that the FD contains
(A: )gst_chk.exe and gst_chk.txt.
5-2 Double-click on gst_chk.exe from FD drive (A: ).

5-1

5-2

5-3 A command prompt screen is opened and input of Year, Month, and Date is
prompted. If the current date displayed in the parentheses is correct, press Enter.
When the date displayed is incorrect, enter the current date.
Enter the Sort No. from the command prompt screen as shown below.

5-3

Enter the year using four digits. (If the displayed year is correct, press
Enter.)
Enter a month (1 to 12). (If the displayed month is correct, press Enter.)
Enter a day (1 to 31) (If the displayed day is correct, press Enter.)

-23

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

5-4 Enter "1" for Print No. and press the Enter key.
5-5 Enter, in the check sheet, the evaluation values that are displayed in the order of R,
G, and B on the Left and Right columns.
If all the values are within the standard <<10 or less>>, end the session. When
"If you type any key, exit this program" is displayed on the command prompt
screen, close the screen by pressing any key.
After ending the session, remove the FD from the FD drive.
5-4

5-5

When the values are outside of the standard value <<10 or less>>, adjust the shims in
the three sections of the projection section installation section. (In this case, follow the
instruction described in the procedure for replacing the projection section (6-3-1.
Replacing scanning section) for mounting and removing the projection section.)
Determine the adjustment size based on the only one with largest absolute evaluation
value among those of R, G, and B.
Code of evaluation value
(Those whose values are the
maximum)
Left is a positive value and
Right is a negative value

Left is a negative value and


Right is a positive value

Processing of shim
Insert a shim of the adjustment size in each of the two
sections on the Right-hand side or if it can be removed,
remove the shim of the adjustment size from the lefthand side.
Insert a shim of the adjustment size in the left-hand side
or if it can be removed, remove the shim of the
adjustment size from each of the two sections on the
right-hand side.

Shim adjustment value: Number of shims (0.1mm in thickness)=( Absolute evaluation value 5)
* Of the three sections of the projection section installation section, make sure that the same
number of shims are increased or reduced for the two sections on the right-hand side.
The evaluation values indicated above are used for the following example.
Evaluation values
Red
Green
Blue

Left
3.104575
10.138659
4.949833

Right
3.104575
10.138659
4.949833

<Action to be taken>
Loosen the three screws that are fixing image capture
unit.
Shim adjustment value is calculated at 2, because
10.138659 as the largest value is divided 5.
Put two 0.1mm-thick shims (or one 0.2mm-thick- shim)
with the cutouts alignment on two fixing holes at right
side.
Fasten the three fixing screws.
Restart from Item (4) Checking the light source unit.

-24

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

6 Final processing
Click "No Print" button again.
Shim size check sheet
Shim size (0.1mm units)
Left

Left

Right
front

Evaluation value (Left)


Sort
No.

Shim adjustment size (0.1mm units)


Left
Add when evaluation
when value Left) is -5

Right
Add when evaluation
value (Left) is 5

Initial
After 1st
adjustment
After 2nd
adjustment
After 3rd
adjustment
After 4th
adjustment
After 5th
adjustment

Check that no floppy disk remains in the PC and end the adjustment work.
Return to the procedure for replacement of the projection section and start installation of the cover.

-25

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

6-3-2. Replacing driving speed changer


[Preparation]
1. Remove the AFC and 135 film stocker from the film scanner.
2. Remove the film scanner from the table, and place it on a level, hard table.
(Required tools)
Stabilized screwdriver, general Phillips screwdriver, and long Phillips screwdriver
(WYNN: Multi-purpose grease)

1 Following the steps 1 thorough 3 in [6-3-1. Replacing scanning section], remove front cover,
upper cover (right), and upper cover (left) of the film scanner.
2 Remove the two screws a (M4 x 12 SEMS 2) that secure the driving unit cover b, and remove
the cover slanting it forward.
(Tool: Phillips screwdriver)
<Top view of film scanner (Left side)>

<Top view of film scanner (Right side)>

a
a

-26

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

3 Disconnect the connectors.


Driving speed changer: 4 connectors (motor
c, JP7 d, JP8 e, and JP9 f)

e f
4 Image capture unit: 1 connector
Disconnect IEEE1394. Remove the screw h
from the cord retainer g, and remove the cord
retainer and then the cord bush i.
Remove the two screws k from the wiring
support j, turn it with the IEEE1394 l cable
to the rear, and take them away from the top of
the driving speed change unit.

h
g
i

kl

5 3. Remove the four screws m (M4 x 12 SEMS


2) that secure the driving speed change unit.
(Tool: Long Phillips screwdriver)

-27

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

6 4. Remove the four screws n (Truss M4 x 8)


that secure the rear cover, and loosen the
three screws o.
(Tool: Phillips screwdriver)
7 Remove the driving speed change unit from
the main unit. Be careful not to catch the wiring
in removing it.

n
POINT
The driving speed changer is tightly secured
for maintaining the precision of the
positioning control axis.

8 Secure the driving speed changer to the input


unit with the four screws (M4 x 8 SEMS 2).
(Basically, install it in reverse order (7 to 2) of
the removal steps.
NOTE
When mounting a new driver gearbox, fit the
pin at the receptor for fastening.
(Tool: Long Phillips screwdriver)

9 Secure the rear cover with the four screws (Truss M4 x 8) you removed and the three screws you
loosened in step 6.
!0 Connect the connectors you disconnected in III-2. (Refer to step 4 and 3).
Install the wiring support (2 screws), the cord bush, and the cord retainer (1 screw), and then
connect the connector (IEEE1394) to the image capture unit and the four connectors (motor, JP7,
JP8, and JP9) to the driving speed changer.
!1 Secure the driving unit cover with the two screws (M4 x 8 Semusu II) you removed in step 2 .

-28

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

!2 Re-mount the covers, etc. that were removed in step 1, and install the film scanner.
(1) Install the upper left cover with the six screws (Truss M4 x 8).
(2) Install the upper right cover with the six screws (Truss M4 x 8).
(3) Install the front cover with the screw (M4 x 14 SEMS 2).
(Tool: Stabilized screwdriver)
(4) Apply multi-purpose grease to the positioning control axis.
POINT
- If you do not apply grease on it, the lifetime is extremely shorten.
Recommended grease manufacturer: Wynn OIL COMPANY (U.S.A.)
Product name: Wynn's E.P. Multi-Purpose Grease No. 2

Apply grease here.

(5) Place the film scanner on the system table, and align their surfaces with each other.
(6) Install the AFC and 135 film stocker.
(7) Wire the image capture unit exactly as before you removed, and then turn on the power.

6-3-3. Check dirt on drive gears


1 Check dirt on the position regulating axis of the drive gears.
2 If dirt is found (axis looks black or dust is found on grease), wipe off the old grease using a
specified dry, soft, lint-free cloth.
3 Apply multi-purpose grease to the position regulating axis.

Apply grease here.

Recommended grease manufacturer: Wynn OIL COMPANY (U.S.A.)


Product name: Wynn's E.P. Multi-Purpose Grease No. 2
Remove and mount the carriers once or twice to make grease conform to the position regulating
axis.

-29

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

6-3-4. Replacing scanner driver board


(Required tools)
Stabilized screwdriver, general Phillips screwdriver, long Phillips screwdriver,
precision driver (for adjusting power VR), and multimeter (which can read two decimal places in
measuring voltage)

1 Following the steps 1 thorough 3 in [6-3-1.


Replacing scanning section], remove front
cover, right top cover, and left top cover of the
film scanner.
2 Remove the driving speed changer according
to the procedure explained in "6-3-2. Replacing
driving speed changer."
3 Replacing the scanner driving board a
Remove the three connectors (CN600, CN601,
and non-numbered one) from the board.
Remove the two screws b, and remove the
board together with the driver-mounting plate.
Remove the locking supports, and replace the
scanner driving board a.
4 Install the removed components exactly as
before.

-30

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

6-3-5. Replacing power supply


1 Following the steps 1 thorough 3 in [6-3-1.
Replacing scanning section], remove front
cover, upper cover (right), right top cover and
left top cover of the film scanner.

2 Remove the connector a (JJ1) from the inside


(below the flywheel of the drive gear section)

3 Disconnect the two connectors b (SUP1CN2 and SUP2-CN2).

4 Remove the earth wire c (one screw)

5 Remove the power supply together with the


seat.
(Loosen screw d (M4 x 14 SEMS 2) and
remove screw e (M4 x 14 SEMS 2).

POINT

Lift here and pull out the


power supply unit toward you.

-31

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

6 Mount a power supply to replace (with due


attention not to catch wires).
Replacement of SUP1:
Remove three screws f and the connector g
(SUP1-CN).
Mount SUP1 to replace, and reinstall the
removed parts.
Replacement of SUP2:
Remove three screws h and the connector i
(SUP2-CN).
Mount SUP2 to replace, and reinstall the
removed parts.

f
f

7 Install the power supply section in the original


position together with the seat carefully so as
not to catch the cable and fix it with two
screws.
8 Tighten the screws in reverse order of the
removal steps, and connect the connectors
(JJ1, SUP1-CN1, and SUP2-CN2).
Reinstall a grounding terminal.

-32

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

9 Check for power supply.


When adjusting a board or a replacing a power supply unit, use a ceramic screwdriver.
Do not use a metal screwdriver.
(1) Connect the AC cord, and turn on the film scanner.
(2) 5-2. Adjust the output voltage of SUP1 +5 V.
Tools: Precision screwdriver and multimeter (Those that can be measured up to two decimal
places)
Measure the voltage at TP on the DC-TMR board, and adjust the voltage of the power
supply +5 V with the control of DC power (SUP1).
Power supply
to be
adjusted

VR

Measuring point

SUP1(+5V1) SUP1 VR DC-TRM board TP3(+5V)-TP4(GND)

Allowable
range

Check

4.955.05V

SUP1 VR

(3) Check for voltages.


Tool: Multimeter (Those that can be measured up to two decimal places)
Power supply

Measuring point

Allowable range

+5V1

TP3(+5V)-TP4(GND)

4.955.05V

+15V

TP1(+15V)-TP2(AGND)

14.016.0V

+24V

TP5(+24V)-TP6(PG)

22.825.2V

Check

(4) After shutting down the input station, turn off the film scanner, and then disconnect the AC
cord.

!0 Re-mount the covers, etc. that were removed in step 1, and install the film scanner.
(1) Install the upper left cover with the six screws (Truss M4 x 8).
(Tool: Phillips screwdriver)
(2) Install the upper right cover with the six screws (Truss M4 x 8).
(Tool: Phillips screwdriver)
(3) Install the front cover with the screw (M4 x 14 SEMS 2).
(Tool: Stabilized screwdriver)
(4) Place the film scanner on the system table, and align their surfaces with each other.
(5) Install the AFC and 135 film stocker.
(6) Wire the image capture unit exactly as before you removed, and then turn on the power.

-33

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

6-3-6. Replacing AFC CPU board/DC TRM board

1 Following the steps 1 thorough 3 in [6-3-1.


Replacing scanning section], remove front
cover, right top cover, and left top cover of the
film scanner.

2 Replacing the AFC CPU board a and DC


TRM b.
Remove the connectors from the board.
Remove the six locking supports that secure
the board, and replace the AFC CPU board a
and DC TRM b.

3 Install the removed components exactly as


before.

IMPORTANT
- When replacing the AFC-CPU board, confirm the versions of the AFC and FPGA, and update
the FPGA to the latest version and/or download the AFC device as needed.

6-3-7. Replacing fan

1 Remove the connectors (PSCN9) connected to


the fan. Remove the two hexagonal-head
screws a and replace the fan.

-34

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

6-4. 135AFC
6-4-1. Replacing 135LED board

1 Open the press-fit cover and remove three


screws a.

2 Remove the press-fit cover b.


3 Remove the two connectors from the board,
remove the three screws c, and replace the
135 board.
4 Install the removed components exactly as
before.

-35

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

6-4-2. Replacing PD-AMP board

1 Remove four screws a and remove the


bottom cover.

2 Remove the connectors connected to the


board. Remove two screws b and then
remove the PD-AMP board c to replace.
POINT
- Be careful not to catch the stranded wire.

3 Install the removed components exactly as


before.

-36

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

<Note>
When replacing PD-AMP, the flexible cable is locked even if it is not inserted securely.
After removing the flexible cable, insert the cable securely so that the terminal (silver part) is
completely hidden before locking.
Figure 2 below shows a cable that may occasionally fail to contact. (Seems to be firmly inserted,
but is not fixed. Pulling a cable causes disconnection.)
Figure 3 shows a cable mounted correctly.
PD-AMP board

Flexible cable

Connector is locked without firm connection


of cable (cable is disconnected easily).

Figure 1. Back view of 135AFC


(back cover is removed)

Lock
Terminal (silver part)
shows
Figure 2. Faulty connection

Lock

Terminal (silver part) is


hidden
Figure 3. Proper connection

If connection is faulty, power is not supplied to sensor detection light LED, causing failure of
LED illumination. That causes no detection of film, no film transportation, and no detection of error.

-37

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

6-4-3. Cleaning sensor

1 Remove the bottom cover following the step 1


in [6-4-2. Replacing PD-AMP board].

2 Removed and clean SENS A a (3 points) and


SENS B b (2 points) by removing screw c (1
point).
Fix SENS A as it is. Using caution not to catch
wire, mount SENS A.
[Fix SENS B referring to drawing below as it
has direction to be pushed.]

c
a

POINT
- F No. and DX code cannot be read correctly
unless it is placed at the correct position.

3 Install the removed components exactly as before.

-38

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

6-4.4. Cleaning the cleaning brushes (upper and lower)

NOTE
- Use a blower brush to clean it.
- Do not use an air duster or the like of which air pressure is too high and bristles go inside.

[Cleaning the upper cleaning brush]

a
1 Remove the press-fit cover following the steps
1 through 2 in [6-4-1. Replacing 135 LED
board].
2 Remove two screws a, and remove the
cleaning brush b together with brush holder
bracket and then clean the brush.
3 Install the removed components exactly as
before.

-39

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

[Cleaning the lower cleaning brush]


1 Remove four screws a and then remove the
bottom cover.

2 Remove two screws b, and remove the


cleaning brush c together with brush holder
bracket and then clean the brush.
3 Install the removed components exactly as
before.

-40

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

6-4-5. Replacing timing belt

1 Open the press-fit cover. Remove the two


screws a, and the remove the tension plate
b.
2 Remove and replace timing belt c.

b
3 Install a tension plate Assy b and fix it with
screws (2 screws).
4 Adjust tension of timing belt after replacing it.

5 Install the removed components exactly as


before.

-41

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

Adjusting the tension of the timing belt

1 Remove the four screws from the rear cover of the 135AFC.
2 Loosen the two screws from the tension plate assembly.
3 Run the timing belt several times by turning the knob at the rear, and confirm that it does not get
onto the pulley.
4 Secure the tension plate assembly with the two screws in the state in which the tension spring
and the timing belt are balanced. Avoid rotation of the tension plate when loosening screw.

Tension spring

* A pin extends from the products of only the initial lot, and they do not have the tension spring.
After taking the steps 1 to 3 above, apply a load of 350 to 500 gN to the timing belt between the
pulleys and secure the tension bracket with the screws in the state in which the deflection of the
timing belt is 3 mm.
Do not fix the timing belt with a pin.
If the tension panel Assy is simply fixed from the top, too much load is applied to the timing belt.

Pin

-42

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

6-4-6. Replacing rod lens

1 Remove four screws a and then remove the


bottom cover.

2 Remove two screws b and remove rod lens


c for replacing
3 Install the removed components exactly as
before.

c
b

-43

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

6-5. Input-unit PC
6-5-1. Replacing input-unit PC
(Required components)
With machines for Japan: 270087001C Personal computer unit: 1
With UL or CE machines: 270287001C Personal computer unit (English version): 1
* The features (e.g., appearance and configuration) of personal computers are all the same except the
operating system.
With a personal computer containing the operating system in Japanese, drive C is identified by the
red round sticker.
With a personal computer containing the operating system in English, drive C is identified by the
green round sticker.
Drive D for storage is common to the operating systems in both Japanese and English and is
identified by the yellow round sticker.
(Required tool)
3.5-inch floppy disk (1.4MB, formatted): 1

Input-unit personal computer replacement procedure

[1] Backing up the data

[2] Replacing the personal computer

[3] Restoring the data

[4] Confirming setup and operation

[1] Backing up the data


Make backup copies on the 3.5-inch floppy disk according to the procedure explained in "12-1-1. Input
Station DP-1000 Data Backup" of the separate document "12. Application data backup and reloading
procedures."

-44

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

[2] Replacing the personal computer


NOTE
- Shut down the input station, turn off the film scanner, disconnect the AC cord and wiring, and
then start the operation below.
(1) Remove the connectors from the rear of the personal computer.
(2) Remove the personal computer from the table.
(3) Place the new personal computer on the table.

Voltage setting switch


* Set the voltage setting switch as follows:
Japan 115V
UL 115V
CE 230V

-45

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

(4) Connect the cables to the connectors on the rear of the personal computer.

<Current PC>

6
!0

4
7
5

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
!0

Dedicated keyboard (USB)


Full keyboard (PS/2)
Mouse (PS/2)
CRT (Video Board)
Flat bed scanner (SCSI)
PC card reader (USB)
Scanner unit (IEEE1394)
HUB (Internal LAN)
AC cable (Inlet)
UPS (RS-232C)

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
!0

Dedicated keyboard (USB)


Full keyboard (PS/2)
Mouse (PS/2)
CRT (Video Board)
Flat bed scanner (SCSI)
PC card reader (USB)
Scanner unit (IEEE1394)
HUB (Internal LAN)
AC cable (Inlet)
UPS (RS-232C)

<New PC (Type 2)>

!0

8
4
7
5
1

-46

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

[3] Restoring the data


Restore the backup data from the 3.5-inch floppy disk according to the procedure explained in "12-2-1.
Restoration from Input Station DP-1000 Backup Data" of the separate document "12. Application data
backup and reloading procedures."

[4] Confirming setup and operation


1) Film scanner setup
Set up the film scanner.
Mode: Setup 12. Individual setup 122. Film scanner setup
(1) Shading data creation (for general-purpose machine 135 and/or 240)
Scanner setup procedure

1 Check the current carrier(s) in the "Carrier used" field.


Examples: Only 135AFC used: Check 135AFC.
135AFC and 240AFC used: Check both.
UFC, 135AFC and 240AFC used: Check all the three.
2 After setting the carrier, click the "Setup Start" button. Proceed the setup according to the
instructions on the screen.

(2) Backing up the input station data


1 Setup 15 Data management 151 Create backup data
2 The tag is set to "Input ST."
3 Confirm that the write destination (Specify to which) is C:, and click the create backup
copy button.

-47

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

7. MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION OF PRINTER SECTION (DP-1000E)


IMPORTANT:
Turn off all power sources.
When unplugging the power cord, make sure that the power has been
completely turned off, and remove the plug from the socket by pulling on the
plug connector section, not the power cable. (Use the same method for
plugging in the unit)
Before removing circuit boards, switches or sensors in the system, discharge
static electricity from your body by touching other metal part of the system.
When adjusting a board or a replacing a power supply unit, use a ceramic
screwdriver. Do not use a metal screwdriver.

7-1. Air filter


7-1-1. Cleaning air filter

1 Remove air filters a of printer section.


2 Wash the filters with water, dry the filters well,
and then re-mount the filters.
Replace if it is too dirty.

-1

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

3 Remove thumb screw b under the sub drive,


and then remove the filter mounting plate.
4 Wash the filter c, dry the filter well and then
re-mount the filter.

b
c

-2

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

7-2. Magazine Mounting section


7-2-1. Check and replace pin slide plate

[Check]
1 Check that shutter pin of the magazine is pressed,
and check the pin for wearing.
[Replace]
1 Remove two screws a.
Replace the pin slide plate b. (Loosen two screws
a to adjust the height of pin slide plate b.

Standard for adjustment


- The shutter pin at the top of paper magazine must be pressed by 2.8mm plus or minus
0.2mm when the shutter is open, allowing the paper to be pulled out at no load.

-3

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

7-2-2. Replace light shield

1 Check deterioration of the light shield (sponge) a


of 8-inch magazine adapter and printer unit.
2 Replace the light shield with new one as
necessary.

8-inch magazine adapter assy

7-2-3. Check operation of lock lever

1 Check that lock lever a rotates smoothly to release the sub drive pinch roller toward upper
position, and check that the roller is held down at lower position anchoring the magazine firmly.

-4

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

7-2-4. Clean photo sensor

[Clean]
1 Take out the sub drive.

2 Remove connector a.
3 Remove screw b.
4 Remove sensor.

5 Clean the photo sensor with a blower brush.

7-2-5. Clean and replace entrance sensors (two sensors)


b

[Clean]
1 Take out the sub drive.
2 Remove two screws a, and then remove the
entrance sensor mounting plate b and entrance
sensor (DET).
3 Remove two screws c, and then remove the
entrance sensor mounting plate d and entrance
sensor (LED).

4 Clean the entrance sensor with a blower brush.


[Replace]
1 Remove two screws e, and remove the entrance
sensor mounting plate f together with entrance
sensors g, and then replace the components.

2 After mounting new sensors, check the on-and-off


operations.

3 Reinstall the removed components.


e
g

-5

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

7-2-6. Clean and replace Magazine-Data board

[Clean]
1 Remove two screws a, and then remove the
sensor cover.
2 Clean the Magazine-Data board with a blower
brush.
[Replace]
1 Remove four screws b and connector c, and
then remove and replace Magazine-Data board.
a

2 Reinstall the removed components.

-6

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

7-3. Operation Panel


7-3-1. Replacing LCD-CPU board and inverter power supply

1 Open the printer front door.


2 Remove two screws on front a that holds top
panel, and open the top panel and support the
door with the support bar.
3 Remove two screws b on the operation panel
mounting plate, and remove the operation
panel together with the unit.

4 Remove four screws c and connectors


(LCCN3 and LCCN5, and then replace LCDCPU board d.

POINT
- Confirm that the new LCD board is set as
shown below.
- SW1: OFF
- VR1: Rightmost

IMPORTANT
- When replacing the LCD-CPU board, confirm
the versions of the LCD and Resource,
and download the driver as needed.

5 Then, remove two locking supports e at the


back side, and replace the inverter power
supply f.
6 Install the removed components exactly as
before.

-7

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

7-3-2. Replacing operation touch panel and LCD module

1 Open the printer front door.


2 Remove two screws on front a that holds top
panel, and open the top panel and support the
door with the support bar.
3 Remove the four washer-provided screws b (2
for each retainer), and remove the right and left
retainers c.

NOTE
- To prevent the operation panel from
dropping, hold it with your hand while
carrying out the work.

4 Remove the four washer-provided screws d


from the LCD module.

-8

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

5 Remove two flexible cables g connected to


operation touch panel and LCD module, and
remove connector (N77) h connected to the
inverter power supply, and then replace the
operation touch panel and LCD module i.

6 Procedure for attaching touch panel insulation


Applicable machine number: 2710: 0027 (except 0026 machine)
2716: 0127
(1) Verify that the power of the unit has been turned off.
(2) Open the front door, raise the top plate, and fix it using the prop.
(3) Spread a piece of cloth by the side of the operator panel unit (so you can place the removed
touch panel on it).

Spread cloth

-9

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

(4) Take off left retaining plate (1) (271011098E). The screws, spring washers, and flat washers
holding the retaining plate are all separate pieces. Be careful not to lose them while removing
them.
NOTE
Under no circumstances should you use SEMS screws (one-piece screws, spring
washers, and flat washers).
Then, take off right retaining plate (2) (271011099E). When doing this, hold down the touch
panel to prevent it from slipping down as you remove the retaining plate.

Retaining plate-holding screws are enclosed (two screws per plate).

Retaining
plate (1)
271011098E

Retaining
plate (2)
271011099E

Touch panel587076901B

(5) Turn the touch panel around its left side (see photos below), and place it on the cloth. When
doing this, be careful not to jerk or break the flat cable.

Keep an eye on flat cable.

-10

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

(6) Stick the insulating sheets (271011148A) on the LCD frame. Stick the sheets both at the top
and at the bottom by making them flush with the LCD port frame. Carefully keep the sheets
from protruding into the image area. Do not cover the air vents at the top of the LCD. (The
insulating sheet size is 9 mm x 150 mm.)

Insulating sheet (271011148A).


Do not cover air vents.

LCD frame
(584076701A).

To be flush.

To be flush.

LCD port frame


To be flush.

To be flush.

9 mm
150 mm

Insulating sheet (271011148A).

(7) To assemble the operator panel unit, put the touch panel back on the LCD, and partly tighten
right retaining plate (2), while holding down the touch panel. Next, attach and partly tighten left
retaining plate (1).
At this point, check to see that the plates (plastic) on the retaining plate insides for positioning
the touch panel are not riding on top of it.
Adjust the position until the gaps are uniform between the touch panel frame and LCD port
frame at the top, bottom, left, and right. Then, fully tighten the retaining plates. (Adjust the
position by watching the gaps between the gray LCD frame and green touch panel parts.
This completes the assembling.
7 Install the removed components exactly as before.
8 Turn on the printer-processor, and check the touch panel to be sure that it operates without any
signs of malfunction.
* The display intensity can be reduced by pressing the top-right corner of the operator touch panel.
The intensity can be increased by pressing the top-left corner.

-11

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

7-4. Printer-Unit PC
7-4-1. Replacing printer-unit PC

Printer-unit personal computer replacement procedure

[1] Backing up the data

[2] Replacing the personal computer

[3] Restoring the data

[4] Confirming setup and operation

[1] Backing up the data


Make backup copies on the 3.5-inch floppy disk according to the procedure explained in "12-1-1.
Printer DP-1000 Data Backup" of the separate document "12. Application data backup and reloading
procedures."

-12

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

[2] Replacing the personal computer


When completing the backup of the personal computer data, turn off the printer processor power
switch (breaker). Start the replacement procedure after the personal computer has shut down. It shuts
down about two minutes after the breaker is turned off. Make sure of the shutdown by the buzzer or
POWER LED.
1) Remove eight machine screws a that secure the front cover of the personal computer unit, and
remove the front cover.

2) Open the printer front door.


Remove the two screws a that secure
the top plate, and open it.
Remove three screws b holding the back
cover.
Close the top panel.
Remove two screws on back cover. (Only
loosen the screws at the top.) Tilt the
back cover toward back, and pull up the
cover to remove.

-13

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

3) Check for the cable clamps.


* Before starting the work, unclamp the LAN cable and HDC-PCI cable on the rear of the personal
computer. (There are two cable clamps at the circled positions in the picture.)
Top view of the personal computer

Side view from the rear of the personal computer

2 cable clamps (upper and lower)

2 cable clamps on the


rear of L sheet metal

HDC-PCI cable
LAN cable
4) Slide the personal computer forward (toward the magazine).
Stop sliding when the top of the personal computer extends about 15 cm.
* Be careful not to pull any cables in sliding the personal computer.

About 15 cm

-14

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

5) Disconnect the following from the rear of the personal computer.


1 LAN cable
2 Serial connector (D-sub9P)
3 Serial connector (D-sub37P)
4 HDC-PCI connector
5 Power cord
Top view of the personal computer

Rear view of the personal computer

3
4
2

6) Remove the personal computer from the printer unit.

-15

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

7) Install the new personal computer, connect the following to the rear of the personal computer, and
clamp them:
1 LAN cable
2 Serial connector (D-sub9P)
3 Serial connector (D-sub37P)
4 HDC-PCI connector
5 Power cord
Rear view of the personal computer

3
4
2

8) Set the new personal computer to the specified position. (To make the wiring neat, set the personal
computer to the position shown below.)

About 3 cm

-16

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

9) Install the front cover of the personal computer unit, close the top plate, and secure them with the
machine screws.
- Front cover of the personal computer unit: 8 machine screws
- Top plate: 2 machine screws

IMPORTANT
- The screw of the front cover of the personal computer also prevents light leakage.
Be sure to tighten all the screws into the original holes.
- Since the screws (2 screws) for fixing the top plate are not normally handled by customers, make
sure the screws are fixed properly.

[3] Restoring the data


Restore the backup data from the 3.5-inch floppy disk according to the procedure explained in "11-1-2.
Restoration from Printer DP-1000 Backup Data" of the separate document "11. Application data
backup and reloading procedures."

[4] Confirming setup and operation


Check for the following test prints:
1 Head calibration correction test print
Mode: Setup 12 Individual setup 124 Head calibration
2) Master channel correction test print
Mode: Setup 12 Individual setup 125 Correct master channel color
3) Head position adjustment test print
Mode: Maintenance 24 Printer unit 245 Adjust head positions

[2] Backing up the printer data


1 Setup -> 15 Data management 151 Create backup data
2 The tag is set to "Printer unit."
3 Confirm that the write destination (Specify to which) is C:, and click the create backup copy
button.

-17

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

7-4-2. Replacing HDC-PCI board


When no work space is available on the side of the printer, remove the clamp and each connector
according to [2] Personal computer replacement of the printer PC, withdraw the personal computer,
and carry out the work.

1 Remove the rear cover from the printer


according to the procedure explained in "7-4-1.
Replacing printer-unit PC, [2] Replacing the
personal computer. "
2 Remove 7 screws a and remove the output
PC cover.

a
a

3 Remove the connector from the SCSI that is


connected with the HDC-PCI board.
4 Remove a screw b and pull out the HDC-PCI
board c to remove and replace the board.
5 Install the removed components exactly as
before.

POINT
- Confirm that DSW1 of the new HDC-PCI
board is set as shown below.

1: ON, 2: OFF, 3: ON, 4: ON

IMPORTANT
- When replacing the HDC-PCI board, confirm
the version of the FPGA, and update the FPGA
to the latest version as needed.

-18

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

7-5. Sub drive


7-5-1. How to remove sub drive

1 Turn the magazine lock lever a to "Lock"


side.

2 Loosen the thumbscrew b (one screw)


completely.
3 Place 7 hose c to the OPEN side and
remove the hose.
4 Hold the handle (A-1) and the pull out the
sub drive slightly.
5 Hold the sub drive shaft (A-2 and A-3) and
remove the sub drive.

POINT
- When removing a sub drive section for
maintenance of the magazine unit (type 1)
connection or fixing paper jam, remove the
exit guide of the double magazine unit and
then remove the sub drive.
Alternatively, remove the double magazine
unit fixing screws (upper and lower) and shift
the double magazine to the left side.

-19

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

7-5-2. Cleaning inside paper dust duct (Every six month)

1 Take out the sub drive, unlock the snap lock 3


and remove the paper dust duct 2.

2 Remove the two screws a and four screws b.

NOTE
- The duct stationary plate c to secure a catch
clip is installed with the screws. Be careful
not to drop or lose the stationary plate.

3 Open the paper dust duct, remove the


discharging brush and guide d from the duct,
and clean the inside of the paper dust duct with
a blower brush.

NOTE
- The paper dust duct has the catch e.
Do not forcibly open the paper dust duct.
Doing so may cause damage to the catch.

4 Install the removed components exactly as


before.

-20

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

7-5-3. Cleaning flap plate sensor

1 Take out the sub drive, unlock the snap lock 3


and remove the paper dust duct 2.

2 Remove two screws a, and remove cover (2)


b. Remove wo screws c, and then remove
the front cover d.
3 Remove three screws e, and remove air hose
f.
3

NOTE
When mounting cover (2), make sure that the
potion shown below is securely fit within the
unit.

-21

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

4 Remove a screw g and then remove the flap


plate sensor together with the sensor mounting
board.
5 Remove connector (JP40) and clean the
sensor h.
6 Install the sensor h.

POINT
- Install the sensor h at the lowest position.

7 Install the removed components exactly as


before.

-22

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

7-5-4. Replacing cutter unit

1 Remove air hose following the steps 1


through 3 in [7-5-3. Cleaning flap plate
sensor].

2 Remove the three screws (1 a at the rear, and


2 b at the front) that secure the cutter unit.
3 Remove the wiring from the two clamps, and
disconnect the connector JJ32 c.
Similarly, remove the wiring from the three
clamps, and disconnect the connector JJ51 d.

-23

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

4 Remove the cutter unit.

5 Remove two screws e to remove duct guide


(2) f for replacing cutter unit.
6 Install the removed components exactly as
before.

NOTE

- Be careful of the edge of the cutter in


replacing the cutter unit. Hold the frame but
not the motor g while carrying out the work.

-24

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

7-5-5. Replacing three timing belts

1 Remove the paper dust duct, the cover (2), and


the front cover according to steps 1 and 2 of
the procedure explained in "7-5-3. Cleaning
flap plate sensor."

2 Remove and replace the three timing belts (2


a at the front and 1 b at the rear).
3 Slightly loosen the screw of the tension plate
c.
4 Run each timing belt several times, and secure
the tension plate with the screw in the state in
which the tension spring and the timing belt are
balanced.
5 Install the removed components exactly as
before.

-25

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

7-5-6. Cleaning two cutter sensors, duct detection sensor, and


crimp-style solenoid sensors (upper and lower)
1 Remove the cutter unit following the steps in
[7-5-4. Replacing cutter unit].
2 Clean the cutter sensor a (two sensors) with a
blower brush.
3 Clean the duct detection sensor b and the
crimp-style solenoid sensors (upper and lower)
c with a blower brush.

4 Install the removed components exactly as


before.

-26

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

7-5-7. Cleaning rollers (annually)

[Cleaning the R1 roller]

1 Remove the sub draive following the steps in


[7-5-1. How to remove sub drive].
2 Remove the four screws (2 for each guide) b
that secure the guides (upper and lower) a,
and remove the guides.

3 Wipe the whole circumference of the R1 roller


c with a dump cloth (soak cloth in water and
squeeze it firmly) while turning the knob 1 with
your hand.
4 Install the removed components exactly as
before.

c
1

-27

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

[Cleaning R2 roller]

1 Remove the cutter unit following the steps in


[7-5-4. Replacing cutter unit].
2 Remove screws e and f and then remove
guide plate A.
3 Wipe the whole circumference of the R2 roller
c with a dump cloth (soak cloth in water and
squeeze it firmly) while turning the knob 4 with
your hand.
4 Install the removed components exactly as
before.

-28

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

[Cleaning and replacing the R3 roller and the


exit sensors (upper and lower)]

a
<Cleaning the R3 roller>
1 Remove the two screws a (right and left), and
remove the mounting plate ((b)) of the lower
exit sensor.

-29

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

2 Remove the two screws c, and remove the


mounting plate d of the upper exit sensor.

3 Wipe the whole circumference of the R3 roller


e with a dump cloth (soak cloth in water and
squeeze it firmly) while turning it with your
hand.

<Cleaning the exit sensors (upper and lower)>


1 Clean the upper and lower exit sensors f,
which are installed on the sensor-mounting
plates, with a blower brush.

<Replacing the exit sensors (upper and lower)>


1 Remove the two screws g, and replace the
exit sensors f.
2 Install the removed components exactly as
before.

-30

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

7-5-8. Replacing SDU-DRV board

1 Remove the two screws a, and remove the


board cover.
2 Remove the cables from the cable clamp b,
and disconnect the seven connectors and the
ground c.
3 Remove the two screws d from the side, and
pull out the SDU-DRV board together with the
mounting plate e.

4 Remove the six locking supports, and replace


the SDU-DRV board.

5 Place the SDU-DRV board which is on the


mounting plate, back to the original position,
connect the connectors and ground wire, and
clamp the cables.
6 Install the removed components exactly as
before.

-31

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

7-6. Exposure unit / Exposure feed unit


7-6-1. Replacing exposure unit

Exposure unit replacement procedure

1. Remove the exposure transfer unit from the printer unit.

2. Separate the exposure unit from the exposure transfer unit.

3. Install the new exposure unit in the exposure transfer unit.

4. Register the provided exposure unit data (FD) into the printer unit.

5. Check for the skew and transfer center.

1 Remove exposure unit.


Remove screws a (9 screws) and remove
Printer CPU cover.
2 Remove clamps b and c (clamp c is held
down with screw c (one screw)). Remove two
connectors e and f of the exposure unit.

-32

270YE600B
Aug. 2002

fineline6

3 Remove hexagonal-head bolts g (2mm) with


washer.
4 Hold the handle (C-1) of the exposure transfer
unit, and slightly pull out the exposure transfer
unit.

5 Remove the exposure feed unit by holding the


green-labeled potions of the shaft (C-2 and C3). (See "Point" below.)

POINT

If the unit is carried holding other than C-2 and C-3, it will cause deformation (bent)
or breakage then transportation trouble.

-33

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

6 Remove the E ring h fixing the gas spring


using a screwdriver.
7 Unlock the snap lock on the front, open the
exposure unit, remove the gas spring from the
bearing by manually pressing the exposure unit
while the gas spring is stretched and bring it
down. Then, bring down the exposure unit
gently.

9
8

8 Remove the four hexagon head bolts i from


the rear panel.

-34

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

9 Remove the exposure unit j.


(Slightly slide the exposure unit forward, and lift
it off.)

!0 Mount new exposure unit.


<Installation procedure>
(1) Place the new exposure unit on the
feed base of the exposure feed unit.
The transfer base has two positioning pins
k (front and rear). Fit the pins into the front
pin hole and rear pin slot in the exposure
unit.

(2) When having placed the exposure unit on


the exposure feed unit, lock the snap lock.

NOTE
- Do not connect the gas spring and the
exposure unit in this step.
To check the exposure unit for the normal
installation, see if the white-painted screws
on both sides of the exposure unit fit into
the notches.

-35

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

(3) Eliminate any gap by pressing "Section l"


on the top of the hinge side of the exposure
unit and fix the hinge in the exposure feed
section. (4 hexagon screws)

(4) Unlock the snap lock 8, open the


exposure unit, lift the gas spring, connect
the gas spring and the exposure unit to the
gas spring bearing, and install the E ring.
(5) Detach the protection tape from the glass
surface of the exposure unit.
(6) Lock the snap lock 8 again, and confirm
the clearances of the parts m and n.

IMPORTANT
- Each clearance of the parts m and m must
be 0.03 mm or less.

0.03 mm or less

!1 Install the removed components exactly as


before.

0.03 mm or less

0.03 mm or less

0.03 mm or less

No clearance is allowed. (rating: 0.03mm or less)

-36

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

!2 Following the procedures given below, register the provided exposure unit data (FD) on the printer
unit.
1 Preparation
Backup data FD (provided with the exposure unit)
FD name: "DP-1000 Exposure unit data"
Unit number: The serial management number of the exposure unit is shown.
2 Operation for the printer
1) Remove the eight machine screws that secure the front cover of the personal computer
unit in the output section, and remove the front cover.
2) Insert the provided backup data FD into the floppy disk drive of the printer-unit
personal computer.
3) On the LCD panel of the printer, select Mode2.maintain4.Printer
Down arrow()9.Read/Write pixel correction form the printer LCD panel. When
the screen "9. Reading and writing of inter-pixel correction value" appears, select
"Read from FD."

4) When the loading of data is completed, return to the printer HOME screen, and remove
the floppy disk.
5) Install the front cover of the personal computer unit, and secure it with the eight machine
screws.

IMPORTANT
- The machine screws not only secure the front cover but also serve to prevent light
leakage. Be sure to tighten all the screws into the original holes.

-37

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

3 Operation at input station


1) Insert the provided backup data FD into the floppy disk drive of the personal computer.
2) On the home screen of the input station, select Setup 15. Data management
152. Data restore. When the screen "152. Access data" appears, select "Printer unit"
tag.
3) Specify drive A for "Loading Source Drive."

4) Click "Access file list."


Confirm that "pm4.txt" and sh12.txt" are displayed checked in the Dev data list box.
5) Click the "Restore" button.
The message "The loading of data starts" is displayed. Click the "Yes" button.
6) When the loading of data is completed, return to the home screen and remove the floppy
disk.

-38

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

!3 Following the procedures given below, check skew movement and feed center.
When an exposure feed unit is replaced also, carry out the following checking and adjustment.
Skewing adjustment procedures
(Rating)
Within plus or minus 7 pixels (within plus or minus 0.6 mm) against printing length of 381mm.
|B-A| 7 pixels or less (0.6mm or less)
(Procedures)
1 Load the widest paper among ones currently used, which has a width of 203mm or more.
Go to step 7 for adjusting with paper of width less than 203mm.
2 Select Mode2. Maintain 4. Printer 2. produce test prints and then select
"1_pchar27.bmp."
3 Press P>> to specify printing conditions.
Print size width: Select width of test print
Print size length: 381 mm
Overspill: 1.5mm
Press P>> further to specify the following conditions:
Set layout: Fit to paper, Rotate 0
Set image: Fit to Real, Rotate 0
LUT: 1
4 Press "Print."
5 Against transfer direction of output print, measure the charts of A and B position at the
top.
6 With reference to chart reading method, calculate |B-A|.
|B-A| 7 pixels No adjustment is required.
|B-A| 7 pixels Go to step 8.

A
Read chart scales at the top of sheet.
If scale cannot be read, read at the
bottom of sheet (Note that A and B
positions are reversed at the bottom.)

Paper feed direction

This level bar is at the edge.


In this example, 8 level bars
including reference line are seen.

(B)

(A)
A
Chart reading method
Read A and B parts, and calculate
differences.
Judge by the number of level bars
that are recognized.
In example A, bars as far as the
"8th chart" are recognized.
Because the number if level bars
is 17: 10+y' = 710+8 78
Similarly in example B, bars as
far as"5th chart" are recognized.
The number of level bars are 7 in
this example also. Therefore:
710+5 = 75
Thus,
B-Ais 75-78= 3
This example does not require
adjustment.

8th level bars including


reference line are invisible.
Level bar
"7 " lines
10-pixel step
Reference line
Level bar
"' " =8

B
10
pixels

50
pixels

Interval between level bars

-39

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

7 Adjusting with paper of width less than 203mm


Print on the widest paper among ones currently used.
7-1Select 2. Maintain 4. Printer 2. Produce test prints and then select
"1_pchar51.bmp"(grid pattern).
7-2Press P>> to specify printing conditions.
Print size width: Select width of test print
Print size length: 381 mm
Overspill: 1.5mm
Press P>> further to specify the following conditions:
Set layout: Fit to paper, Rotate 0
Set image: Fit to Real, Rotate 0
LUT: 1
7-3Press "Print."
7-4At the A position in the figure below, measure the distance (Xa) between the upper
edge of sheet and the second grid.
At the B position, measure the distance (Xb) between the upper edge of sheet and the
grid at the same point as measured at A.
A peak loupe (x10) makes measurement easier.

7-5Calculate B-A.
Deviation is within plus or minus 0.6mm: No adjustment is required.
If deviation is more than 0.6mm, go to step 8 for adjustment.
One rotation of adjustment screw results in movement of 1.2mm on printing.

-40

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

8 Adjusting procedures
8-1When adjusting on paper with a width of
203mm or more, calculate "-" pixels.
When adjusting on paper with a width less
than 203mm, calculate B-A mm
8-2Measure "D" using a scale.
(This is used for a reference for adjustment.
Measure in mm, to the first decimal place.)
8-3Loosen the four fixing screws shown in the
figure on the right.
8-4If "B-A" calculated in step 8-1 is:
Greater than 0, turn adjustment screw
counter-clockwise.
Smaller than 0, turn adjustment screw
clockwise.
Adjusting on paper with width of 203mm or
more
1 Calculate turns of adjustment screw with
reference to table on the right.
2 Turn the screw for the moving amount.
Measure the moving amount with scale, and
tighten the fixing screws at the front of light
exposure transfer base at a position where D is
appropriate.

Fixing screw Fixing screw

Fixing screw

Fixing screw

Adjustment screw

(Reference) Rotation of adjustment screw and


moving amount
Rotation of
screw

Move of D
(mm)

0.5 turns
1 turn

Moving on print
By pixels

By mm

0.4

0.6

0.7

14

1.2

5 turns

1.1

21

1.8

2 turns

1.5

28

2.4

One turn of adjustment screw moves D by


approx. 0.7 mm, which is moving approx.
14 pixels (approx. 1.2mm)

Adjusting on paper with width less than 203mm


Turn adjustment screw for moving amount.
Measure the moving amount with scale, and tighten the fixing screws at the front of light
exposure transfer base at a position where D is appropriate.
When turning the adjustment screw counter-clockwise (loosening),press the exposure
transfer base to the left to remove play.
Example: Adjustment on paper of width more than 203mm resulted in "B-A=14."
According to the conversion table above, the adjustment screw must be rotated
by one turn, counter-clockwise. If actual distance of D is 80mm before loosing the
fixing screws, one turn of the adjustment screw counter-clockwise results in
moving of D by +0.7mm.
Therefore, the two fixing screws at the front must be tightened when D=800.7
becomes 80.7mm.
9 Output print for verification.
If measurement result satisfies the specifications, turn off the power of the unit, remove
the light exposure/exposure transfer unit, and tighten the two fixing screws at the back.
If measurement result does not satisfy the specifications, loosen the two screws at the
front of light exposure base and repeat adjustment procedures starting with step 8-4.
10Mount exposure/exposure feed unit and turn on the power.

-41

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

Image center adjustment procedures (Mechanism part)


(Rating)
Within plus or minus 6 pixels against paper center (within plus or minus 0.5mm).
Note 1. If the amount of departure is over 6 pixels (0.5mm), adjustment is required.
Note 2. The mechanism allows adjustment of plus or minus 1.5mm physically.
(Procedures)
1 Load the widest paper among ones currently used, which has a width of 203mm or more.
Go to step 7 for adjusting with paper of width less than 203mm.
2 Select 2. Maintain 4. Printer 2. Produce test prints and then select
"1_pchar27.bmp."
3 Press P>> to specify printing conditions.
Print size width: Select width of test print
Print size length: 381 mm
Overspill: 1.5mm
Press P>> further to specify the following conditions:
Set layout: Fit to paper, Rotate 0
Set image: Fit to Real, Rotate 0
LUT: 1
4 Press "Print."
5 Measure the charts of x1 and x2 on the output print.
6 With reference to chart reading method, calculate (X2-X1)/2.
A chart reading method is the same with that for skewing adjustment.
| (X2-X1)/2| 6 pixels No adjustment is required.
| (X2-X1)/2| 6 pixels Go to step 8.

X1

Paper feed direction

X2

-42

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

7 Adjusting with paper of width less than 203mm


7-1 Output test print using paper with a width of 203mm or less.
7-2 Measure the distance between the Magenta cross at the center and paper edge, using
a scale.
7-3 Calculate deviation amount X=B-A)/2.
Deviation is within plus or minus 0.5mm: No adjustment is required.
If deviation exceeds plus or minus 0.5mm, go to step 8.

8 Adjusting procedures
8-1 When adjusting on paper with a width of
203mm or more, calculate "(X2-X1)/2"
pixels.
When adjusting on paper with a width less
than 203mm, calculate (B-A)/2" mm
8-2 Measure "D" using a scale.
(This is used for a reference for adjustment.
Measure in mm, to the first decimal place.)
8-3 Draw lines of connector mounting plate.
(This is used for adjustment.)
8-4 Loosen the fixing screws.
Two fixing screws on adjustment screw
mounting plate
Two fixing screws of connector mounting
plate
(Connector mounting plate moves
forward and backward by 2mm
respectively.)
8-5 For adjusting with paper of a width less
than 203mm, go to step 8-6.
For adjusting with paper with width of
203mm or more, calculate a moving
amount of adjustment screw with reference
to the following conversion table.

Connector mounting plate


ficing screw

Fixing screw

Fixing screw

Adjustment screw

Moving amount table


Number of
Dots

Distance
mm

5
10
15
20

0.42
0.85
1.27
1.69

For example, if X' is 10 pixels,


moving amount of D is 0.85mm.
Moving amount of adjustment screw D for the number of
pixels not listed in table is found by: X=X'*0.0846(mm)

-43

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

8-6 On the basis of calculation results, perform the following adjustments:


The adjustment screw moves by approx.0.7mm (8 pixels) for one rotation.
If calculation resut is "(minus)"
Move connector mounting plate to the back by X (mm) and lock it.
Turn adjustment screw clockwise to (D-X) mm and lock it.
If calculation resut is "+ (plus)"
Move connector mounting plate to the front by X (mm) and lock it.
Turn adjustment screw counter-clockwise to (D-X) mm and lock it.
9 Output print for verification.
If measurement results is out of standard, repeat procedures starting with 8-4.
If mechanical adjustment does not satisfy specifications or requres "zero-adjustment"
endlessly, adjust software with, "3. Image center adjustment procedures, Center
position adjustment by software (main scanning)
10Mount exposure/exposure feed unit and turn on the power.

-44

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

Image center adjustment procedures_sub scanning (Software part)


The following adjustment procedures are applicable only when adjustment is impossible by
either skewing adjustment (mechanism) or image center machical adjustment.
Center position is adjusted by software.
(Rating)
Within plus or minus 6 pixels against paper center (within plus or minus 0.5 mm)
(Procedures)
1 Complete machanical adjustment processes of skewing adjustment and image center
adjustment procedures.
Load the widest paper among ones currently used.
2 Press 2. Maintain 4. Printer 5. Adjust head positions
3 Press "Print."
4 Measure the charts of Y1 and Y2 on the output print.
A chart reading method is the same with that for skewing adjustment.
| (2-1)/2| 6 pixels No adjustment is required.
| (2-1)/2| 6 pixels Go to step 6.
5 With reference to chart reading method, calculate (2-1)/2.

Y1
Y2

Paper feed direction

6 Calculate (2-1)/2, enter calculation result to cetner position Y, and press


"Register."

-45

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

Image center adjustment procedures Main scanning (Software part)


The following adjustment procedures are applicable only when adjustment is impossible by
either skewing adjustment (mechanism) or image center machical adjustment.
Center position is adjusted by software.
(Rating)
Within plus or minus 3 pixels against paper center (within plus or minus 0.2 mm).
(Procedures)
1 Load the widest paper among ones currently used, which has a width of 203mm or more.
Go to step 6 for adjusting with paper of width less than 203mm.
2 Press 2. Maintain 4. Printer 5. Adjust head positions.
3 Press "Print."
4 Measure the charts of x1 and x2 on the output print.
5 With reference to chart reading method, calculate (X2-X1)/2.
A chart reading method is the same with that for skewing adjustment.
| (X2-X1)/2| 3 pixels No adjustment is required.
| (X2-X1)/2| 3 pixels Go to step 7.

X1

Paper feed direction

X2

-46

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

6 Adjusting with paper of width less than 203mm


Measure the distance between the Magenta cross at the center and paper edge, using a
scale. Convert the measurement result into the number of pixels.

Data entry to software must


be in the number of pixels.
Calculate deviation on the
basis of A and B (X'=(BA)/2), and convert the value
into the number of pixels.

Calculation method
X(mm)0.08466(mm)
X(pixels)

Distance
mm

Number of
Dots

0.42
0.85
1.27
1.69

5
10
15
20

7 Calculate X (X2-X1)/2, or calculate the number of pixels on the basis of X', enter
calculation result to center position X, and press "Register."

8 Read the values on scale of print and enter the values for a unit of 1 image

quality ,then press "Rgstr" button. (Mode/2.Maintain/4.Printer/5.Adjust head


positions)
H scan

-***

MB

-***

MG

-47

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

Reading scale:
When placed upright for reading numbers, a print shows lines in colors of yellow,
cyan and magenta.
A value where yellow line overlaps with cyan line is Y value.
A value where magenta line overlaps with cyan line is M value.

Yellow
Cyan
Magenta

*In example above, Y is 0 and M is -1


9 Read the values on scale of print and enter the values for a unit of 0.1 pixel ,then

press "Rgstr" button.


V scan

-***

-***

MX

*See step of main scanning above for reading of values.

-48

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

7-6-2. Replacing cables (HBCN4 assembly (white), HTCN1 assembly (black)),


fluorescent printer head power supply boards, and HEAD-TRM board

1 Unlock the snap lock 8 of the exposure feed


unit.
Hold the handle 9, and slowly lift the exposure
feed unit.

2 Remove five screws a and remove the


exposure unit top cover b.
3 Remove the cables c (HBCN4 assembly
(white), HTCN1 assembly (black)) from the
connectors, and replace the assemblies
according to the procedures below.

b
POINT
- Change the ferrite core.

-49

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

<Replacing the HBCN4 assembly>

(1) Remove the four connectors, and remove


the screw d that secures the clamp.
(2) Remove the HBCN4 assembly r, and
install the new one.

POINT
- When installing the new HBCN4 assembly,
secure the clamp and then connect the
connectors.
- Install the ferrite core at a position 50 mm
from the connector on the side on which the
HEAD-BUF board of the HBCN4 assembly is
installed.

e
50mm

<Replacing the HTCN1 assembly>

f
(1) Remove the connector f, remove the
HTCN1 assembly g, and install the new
one.
(2) Insert the HTCN side of the HTCN1 Assy
to the HTCN1 connector.

-50

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

<Replacing the fluorescent printer head


power Supply boards>
(1) Remove the eight screws (4 for each
board) that secure the fluorescent
printer head power board g, disconnect
the three connectors (BSCN1 to BSCN3, or
GSCN1 to GSCN3), and replace the
boards.

<Replacing the HEAD-TRM board>


(1) Remove the four screws that secure the
HEAD-TRM board h, disconnect the two
connectors (HTCN3 and HTCN4), and
replace the board.

4 Install the removed components exactly as


before.

-51

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

7-6-3. Replacing boards (EFU DRIVE board and SCANNER DRIVER board)

1 Remove the exposure unit according to steps


1 through 5 of the procedure explained in "76-1. Replacing exposure unit."

!1
!2

!3

2 Remove the pinch rollers !2 and !3 (right and


left) and focus roller !1.
3 Remove four screws a immediately
underneath the exposure unit, and remove the
carrier base Assy b.
NOTE

d
The carrier base Assy has a sensor. Take
extra care when handling the component
and remove the connector c (JP48).

e
d

4 Remove two screws d and remove the guide


plate (3) e at lower right of the pinch roller.

5 Remove two screws f on the side and


remove the cover g on the board.

-52

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

6 Remove the locking supports with diagonal


cutting pliers or the like, and replace the EFU
DRIVE board h and scanner drive board i.

POINT
- When mounting the carrier base Assy, fix the
unit at front rightmost position.
- Install the guide (3) pushing to the front
magazine.

NOTE
- If the substrate is removed from the rear of
the unit, the seat is dislocated slightly
according to the manner in which the screw
is set. Therefore, delicate adjustments are
necessary such as bias adjustments.
Do not remove boards from the back of unit.
Follow the procedures above.
7 Install the removed components exactly as
before.

-53

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

7-6-4. Replacing timing belts (two belts)

1 Loosen the two screws a or screws b that


holds down the idler board to loosen the belt
tension.
2 Remove timing belt c or d to replace.
3 Set new belt then turn it several times.
Once it is stabilized, fix by either b or d.

b
c
d

NOTE
Upon looping a timing belt, the belt is
tightened by a tension spring. A position
indicated by e shows a correct status (belt
is balancing with tension spring).
Tighten the two screws here.

4 Install the removed components exactly as


before.

-54

270YE600B
Aug. 2002

fineline6

7-6-5. Greasing cams (Every one year)

1 Remove the components according to steps 1


through 6 of the procedure explained in "7-63. Replacing boards (EFU DRIVE board and
scanner drive board)."

2 Wipe off old grease, lift it with the six cams a


upward, and apply Plus Guard No. 2 to the
cam gearsb.
POINT

- A small amount (about a size of a small


bean) of Plus Guard No. 2 should be applied
lightly to the whole circumference of each
cam gear.
3 Install the removed components exactly as
before.

7-6-6. Cleaning press-fit sensor

1 Remove the components according to steps 1


to 6 of the procedure explained in "7-6-3.
Replacing boards (EFU DRIVE board and
scanner drive board)."

2 Clean the six crimp-style sensors a (2 for


each cam gear) on both sides of the cam gear
with a blower brush.
3 Install the removed components exactly as
before.

-55

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

7-7. Exposure processing section


7-7-1. Replacing PRINTER-CPU board and/or HEAD-BUF board

1 Open the front door, remove the nine screws


a, and remove the PRINTER-CPU board
cover.
2 Replace the PRINTER-CPU board b and/or
HEAD-BUF board c.

<Replacing the HEAD-BUF board>


(1) Remove the six screws, disconnect the
four connectors, and replace the HEADBUF board.

HEAD-BUF board

POINT
- Nothing is connected to the upper connector
d (HBCN2).

IMPORTANT

PRINTER-CPU board

- When replacing the HEAD-BUF board,


confirm the version of the FPGA, and update
the FPGA to the latest version as needed.
<Replacing the PRINTER-CPU board>
(1) Remove the five locking supports,
disconnect the ten connectors, and replace
the PRINTER-CPU board.

IMPORTANT
- When replacing the PRINTER-CPU board,
confirm the versions of the application and
mechanical controller, and download the
latest ones as needed.
3 Install the removed components exactly as
before.

-56

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

7-8. Feeding unit


7-8-1. How to remove feed unit

1 Loosen the thumbscrew b (one screw)*


completely.

2 Pull out the feeding unit by holding the green


handle (D-1) and green label on shaft (D-2).
*On an earlier-lot product, remove one
thumbscrew a and one screw b, and then
remove the feeding unit.

POINT
- If the feed unit is installed after the exposure unit, the paper exit on the right of the exposure unit
may be deformed.
Deformation of the guide (6) causes the skew of paper.

Guide plate (6)

-57

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

7-8-2. Cleaning rollers and paper transfer surface (Yearly operation)

1 Loosen a thumb screw @1 and open the upper


guide plate.

@1

2 Loosen two thumb screws @0, then open and


remove the side guide plate.

@0

3 Wipe the whole circumferences of the drive


rollers a and pinch rollers b with a dump cloth
(soak cloth in water and squeeze it firmly).
4 Wipe the paper transfer surface c with a dump
cloth (soak cloth in water and squeeze it
firmly).
5 Install the removed components exactly as
before.

b
a

c
b

-58

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

7-8-3. Cleaning and replacing sensors


<Cleaning the sensors>
1 Remove the upper guide and the side guide,
and clean the entrance sensor a and exit
sensor b with a blower brush.

2 Install the removed components exactly as


before.

<Replacing the sensors>

Entrance sensor (side)

1 Remove the upper guide and the side guide,


remove the two screws d that secure the
entrance sensor c, and replace the sensor.

2 Remove the two screws f that secure the exit


sensor e, and replace the sensor.

3 Install the removed components exactly as


before.

Exit sensor (upper)

-59

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

7-8-4. Replacing timing belt and applying grease

1 Remove the E-ring a and/or the flange a,


and remove the timing belt.

a
b

POINT
- The timing belt can be removed by removing
the E-ring or the flange.
2 Place the new timing belt, and install the flange
and/or the E-ring.
The timing belt does not need any adjustment.

NOTE

Flange

- Install the pulley D with the flange at the rear


because it contains a one-way clutch.

Pulley D

However, for the 2 sections c, install the


flange on the near side.

3 Apply Plus Guard No. 2 all over the teeth


(crests and roots) of the seven gears d.

NOTE
- To prevent deterioration of the tension belt,
be careful not to put Plus Guard No. 2 to the
belt.

4 Install the removed components exactly as


before.

-60

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

7-8-5. Replacing PFU-DRV board

1 Remove the connectors (PFCN1, 2, 3, 6, 7,


and 8) and flexible cable (PFCN4 and 5) that
are connected to PFU-DRV board.

2 Remove two screws a and remove the PFUDRV board together with the board base.
3 Remove the locking support and replace the
board.

- When replacing the PFU-DRV board, confirm


the version, and download the device as
needed.

4 Install the removed components exactly as


before.

7-8-6. Replacing fan

1 Remove connector (PFCN8) connected to the


fan.
2 Remove four screws a that hold down the fan,
and replace the fan.
3 Install the removed components exactly as
before.

-61

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

7-8-7. Replacing print head

1 Remove ink ribbon cassette a.

2 Remove screws b (two for each, 4 screws in


total), remove the print head and replace the
head.
3 After replacing a print head, verify and adjust
printing density by the following procedures:
Check back printing of a test print.
Check printing density by the following
procedures as required:
1) Loosen two crews c.
2) Turn knob d.
Turning the knob clockwise makes prints
denser, and turning the knob counterclockwise makes prints lighter.
3) Loosen two screws e.
4) Check printing density again.

-62

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

7-9. Power supply


7-9-1. Replacing power supply (including replacement of PSA board and fan)

1 Remove the two screws a, and remove the


power supply unit cover.
2 Disconnect the connectors (PSCN1 to PSCN3
and PSCN6, and SUJ1 to SUJ3), and remove
the hexagon head bolt b.

3 Take out the power supply c.


4 Replace the power supply by removing four
screws. (5 power supplies)

-63

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

5 Remove six screws and connectors (PSCN7,


8, and 9) for replacing PSA board d.
6 Remove two screws and connector (PSCN9)
for replacing the fan e.

7 Install the removed components exactly as


before.

-64

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

8. MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION OF PROCESSOR SECTION


IMPORTANT:
Turn off all power sources.
When unplugging the power cord, make sure that the power has been
completely turned off, and remove the plug from the socket by pulling on the
plug connector section, not the power cable. (Use the same method for
plugging in the unit)
Before removing circuit boards, switches or sensors in the system, discharge
static electricity from your body by touching other metal part of the system.

8-1. J-module II
8-1-1. Cleaning and replacement procedure for the drum of J module II
If the drive belt does not engage with gear teeth even after a clogging tablet is removed, use the same
procedure.
NOTE
Wear protectors (protection glasses, gloves), and turn off the power of processor before
operations. Operation with the power turned on may result in a finger caught in the rotating
drum.
If two of the P1, P2, P3, N1, N2, N3, and N4 J modules are cleaned at the same time, the two
modules may be confused with each other, thus causing contamination. Remove the J modules
separately from each other.

1Removing the drum unit


1 Reset the cartridge to remove it.
2 Push up the left lever (1).

Lever (1)

-1

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

3 Turn the drum knob with fingers to align the knob and housing (lower) marks.

Housing (lower) mark


Drum knob mark

Drum knob
4 Push down the lever (2).

Lever (2)

5 By holding the housing (upper) at its finger tabs (3), remove it.

Finger tab (3)

6 Lift the drum unit to remove it.

-2

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

7 Check the housings (upper and lower), drum unit sliding surface, pockets, and packing.
If powder from the ECOJET module is deposited, wipe it off using a wet cloth or tissue.
To keep the housing (lower) and drum sensor holes free from dust deposits and clogging,
clean the housing and hole using a cotton swab etc.

Packing

Pocket
Sliding surface

Sensor hole

NOTE
- The housing (upper) and drum can be washed in water. Thoroughly let the housing and drum dry
before reinstalling them.
- Exercise care not to let water enter the housing (lower) sensors.
- If the packing is loose, remove it until the double-coated adhesive tape is exposed and then
apply fresh packing.

-3

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

8 Align the housing (lower) and knob marks. Reinstall the drum as illustrated below.
(Periodically replace the drum with a new one.)
Drum mark

Note:
The drum and housing have
P1, P2, and P3 labels and
N1, N2, N3, and N4 labels,
respectively. Do not
confuse these labels with
each other.

Housing (lower) mark


Drum knob mark

Left
Orient the narrower part upward as shown
below.

Right
Orient the hollow upward as shown
below.

9 Reinstall the housing (upper). Pull up the lever (2) to secure the housing after the shaft fits
into place.

!0 Pull down the left lever (1).

!1 In the test mode, detect the drum origin by operating the motor for a drum to which tablets are
to be fed using the ECOJET feeder.
Notes: When choosing a drum origin, match tablets in the cartridge with the drum phase,
referring to Item 2, "Procedure for Checking and Resetting after Maintenance."

-4

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

2Maintenance Precautions and Procedure for Checking and Resetting after Maintenance
Be sure to turn off the power before maintaining the J module.
Reset the module by doing the following after maintenance.
1) Return the drum to its origin by performing one cycle of operation in the test mode (see the
following note).
2) Visually check the remainder of J tables in the cartridge or confirm the remainder of J tablets
stored in the memory through the display and then correct it.
NOTE
If the even-numbered and odd-numbered rows, consisting of remaining tablets in the cartridge,
differ in height, align the drum with an origin, with the drum knob positioned as illustrated below.
Such is the case with modules containing two tablet rows. (If the drum phase is not correspond
to the in-cartridge tablet pattern, an incorrect number of tablets are fed.)
If the even-numbered and odd-numbered rows in the P1 and P2 modules are equal in height, the
drum can freely be aligned with an origin for P3 and N4.

No.1

No.2

No.3

No.4

No.1

No.2

No.3

No.4

Cartridge

Align the drum with


an origin so that the
drum knob mark
can be viewed.

Drum assembly

Align the drum with


an origin so that the
drum knob mark
cannot be viewed.

Drum assembly
Drum knob

Modes for one cycle of origin return


P1J motor test: Mode 226/J motor/P1 additional motor
P2J motor test: Mode 226/J motor/P2 additional motor
P3J motor test: Mode 226/J motor/P3 additional motor

-5

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

8-1-2. Inspection and replacement procedures for J module II packing ASSY

NOTE
Wear protectors (protection glasses, gloves), and turn off the power of processor before
operations. Operation with the power turned on may result in a finger caught in the rotating
drum.
Mounting a wrong type of housing (upper) label ASSY may result in contamination of ECOJET.
Remove housing (upper) labels for each type separately.

1Remove housing (upper) label ASSY


1 Reset cartridge and then remove cartridge.
2 Hold down the front lever (2).

Lever (2)

3 Hold the finger hook (3) and remove the housing (upper label ASSY.
If drum assembly is not replaced, do not remove the drum assembly.

Finger hook (3)

-6

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

2Inspect packing
If removal, damage, or displacement of left-hand or right-hand part (see example of faults on
packing) is found on existing packing ASSY, replace it with a new one.
Correctly affixed packing example
As shown in the photo, no removal or damage must be seen on packing. The left and right edges
of packing ASSY are flush with the both sides of entry opening of housing (upper label) ASSY, or
the packing ASSY must not stick out of the affixing section. If correctly affixed, replacement of the
packing is not required.
Packing ASSY

Housing (upper label) ASSY


Back surface

Surface

Entry opening

Entry opening

Seen from the back, packing is not sticking out.

Cross-section

Packing edges and housing edges are flush with


each other or packing edges are recessed.

<Cross-section of correctly
affixed packing>
Packing edges

Housing (upper) entry


opening side surface.

-7

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

<Faultily affixed packing example (1)>


If packing Assy lies out of housing (upper), replace the packing even if the lying-out part is scant.

Back surface

Surface

Cross-section

<*> Even if a packing ASSY is sticking out of affixing


section of housing (upper) only slightly, replace the
packing with new one.

<Cross-section of affixed
packing example (1)>
Packing edges

Housing (upper) entry opening side surface.

<Faultily affixed packing example (2)>


Even if a packing edge is sticking out of affixing section of housing (upper) only slightly, replace
the packing with new one.

Replace a packing ASSY


separated from the affixing section
packing is separated from the
affixing section of housing (upper).

-8

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

3Removing existing packing


1 Remove existing packing from housing (upper) label ASSY.

Black double-faced tape (adhesive)

Existing packing

2 Black double-faced tape or adhesive may remain. Using a flatblade screwdriver, etc., remove
the tape or adhesive with care not to damage the surface of housing (upper) label ASSY.
(A cutting on housing (upper) may affect hermeticity.)

Roll up the double-face tape with a


flatblade screwdriver and remove the tape.

-9

Black double-faced tape was removed.

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

4Affixing procedures for packing Affix with reference to the example of correct affixing
1 Remove the peeling paper on packing on the left edge, press the left edge of packing against
the affixing potion of housing (upper), so that the packing does not stick out.

Peeling paper

2 While peeling off the paper, lightly press the upper and lower potions of the packing against
the channel.

3 Remove the peeling paper completely, pull over and place the right side of the packing on the
affixing potion, so that it does not stick out (use spreading of the packing).

4 Making sure the affixing position, press the packing thoroughly with fingers to completely affix.
5 If the packing sticks out, remove it and then re-affix before completely affixing.
Re-affixing does not cause problems as long as the adhesive is not damaged or wrinkled up
causing any deformation. If the adhesive has been damaged, removed, or wrinkled up
causing deformation, replace the packing with new one.

-10

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

5Mounting housing (upper) label ASSY


1 (Verify type label and the type of J module II, and mount the housing (upper). Put the housing
on the fixing shaft, and hold up the front lever (2) to secure.

After the left and right fixing shafts fit


correctly, pull back the lever (2).

2 Operate the driving motor for charging ECOJET (tablets) on ECOJET charger to return the
drum to its home position.
Return the drum to home position twice to adjust the drum assembly to its original phase.
Then, load the tablet cartridge and return to usual operations.
Select Maintenance 25. processor section 256. operation test J motor to
perform tests on each J motor:
- P1J motor test : P1 charge motor
- P2J motor test : P2 charge motor
- P3J motor test : P3 charge motor

-11

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

8-2. Checking the paper curls


1 Check paper curl immediately after discharge from the dryer section.
2 When paper curls up within the shaded lines shown in the figure below, the dry
condition of paper is normal.
(The following figure shows the actual size of paper. Actually place the paper on the
figure to confirm the curled condition of paper.)

Feed direction

R200

R8

Direction in which to confirm curling


Proper curling range

Excessive curling
(excessive dryness)

Actual size
Less curling
(insufficient dryness)

Place the paper vertical to the drawing and check paper curls. (Do not place the paper
on the horizontal place to check paper curls.)

Notes on checking the paper curls


a Place the paper vertical to the drawings. (Do not place the paper on the horizontal
place.)
Measuring on paper laid on desk may results in inaccurate measurement.
Pay attention to the measuring direction against paper carrying direction (see
figure above).

-12

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

b The paper curl changes according to printing types, even under the same
installation conditions and the same drying temperature conditions.
Check the paper curl under the conditions below, which cause maximum and
minimum paper curl. It is ideal if the paper curl is within the same range under the
conditions below.
- Maximum paper curl: Printing a single sheet under low humidity in dryer section,
and the components such as rollers are sufficiently heated. (Printing a single
sheet after leaving the system under standby status (8 degrees under a specified
temperature) for 30 minutes or more.)
- Minimum paper curl: Continuous printing of multiple sheets under high humidity in
dryer section, and the components such as rollers are not heated enough.
(Continuous printing immediately after the temperature reached a standby level.)
c The paper curls also affects paper alignment in the sorter. Check that paper for
right-side-up alignment and correctness of paper order.
3 If prints in each size do not satisfy the conditions described above, adjust a drying
temperature so that the paper curls are within a same range for prints of all sizes.

-13

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

9. REPLACING THE BATTERY (PC)


9-1. Replacing the Battery (KIC-1E)
A coin-cell battery (CR2032) powers the real-time clock and CMOS memory. When the computer is
not plugged into a wall socket, the battery has an estimated life of three years. When the computer is
plugged in, the standby current from the power supply extends the life of the battery.
The clock is accurate to 13 minutes/year at 25 C with 3.3 VSB applied.
When the voltage drops below a certain level, the BIOS Setup program settings stored in CMOS RAM
(for example, the date and time) might not be accurate. Replace the battery with an equivalent one.

CAUTION
Risk of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced.
Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer.
Dispose of used batteries according to the manufacturers instructions.

To replace the battery, follow these steps:


1 Turn off all peripheral device connected to the computer. Disconnect the computers power cord
from the AC power source (wall outlet or power adapter).
2 Remove the computer cover.
3 Locate the battery on the board.
4 With a medium flat-bladed screwdriver, gently pry the battery free from its connector. Note the
orientation of the + and - on the battery.
5 Install the new battery in the connector, orienting the + and - correctly.
6 Replace the computer cover.

-1

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

10. PERIODIC REPLACEMENT PARTS


WARNING /
Do not eat ECOJET tablets or
drink solutions. In case tablets
or chemicals are swallowed,
rinse mouth with water, drink
one or two cups of water, and
get medical attention
immediately.

1
2

Precautions:
When replacing parts, take the following precautions.
Turn off the power.
Because you will touch parts inside the machine, be sure to turn off the power for your personal safety.
Be on the alert for potential dangers.
Check in advance to see how you can avoid such dangers as getting your hand pinched between
gears.
Be on the alert for high-temperature parts.
The drying rack, back printer, etc. reach very high temperatures inside the machine.
Wait until the temperatures cool down before your work on these parts.
Handle heavy units carefully
When taking off heavy units, clear the space at your feet, and check carefully to see by which parts
you should hold the units.
Handle chemicals carefully.
During your work on the processor, wear goggles and gloves to keep chemicals from getting on the
skin and into the ey

0-1

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

Throughout the work described in this chapter, you will often remove gears.
The important points on removing gears are mentioned below. Check them thoroughly in advance.

POINT
How to remove a gear held by a cir-clip.

Remove the gear by inserting a precision


slotted screwdriver into the gap in the cir-clip.
(Becareful not to lose the cir-clip.)

To attach the cir-clip, hold it by hand to the


groove in the shaft, and squeeze it in using
long nose pliers.

NOTE
A removed cir-clip suffers some deterioration of performance. Replace it with a spare circlip when you have one.
How to remove a gear held by claws.
Using a precision slotted screwdriver, repeat
the action of opening the right and left claws
outward alternately and pulling the gear
simultaneously.
(To attach the gear, push the gear hole over
the shaft.)

NOTE
When attaching the gear, check to see that the two claws are held securely in the shaft
groove as illustrated below.

0-2

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

POINT
How to remove a retaining ring (plastic)
a

Remove the retaining ring by holding part a between pliers.

NOTE
A removed retaining ring suffers some deterioration of performance. Do not recycle it.

0-3

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

Yearly replacement parts

Part No.

Part name

Qty./unit

Total
qty.

Processing rack No.

Crossover rack No.


2

Squ.
rack

20

0-21

0-22

385002416B Idler gear

0-22

Idler gear
assembly

0-23

385002426A Bearing
385002407B

3850A2408C

56

Water absorbing
roller

Dry
rack

Page

Inlet
rack

385002215B Gear

0-23

251602602A Roller (C)

0-24

Two-yearly replacement parts

Part No.

Part name

Qty./unit

Total
qty.

Processing rack No.


1

AAAA90200171

Timing belt
(processor drive shaft)

Inlet
rack

Crossover rack No.


2

Squ.
rack

Dry
rack

Page

0-26

385002214A Gear

385002216B Gear

24

0-28

1
1

0-30

355002635B

Idler gear
(C)

0-32

355002221B

Idler gear
(A)

0-33

AAAA90100184 Bearing

0-34

AAAA90100185 Bearing

0-35

385002215B Gear

67

12

355002444A

Loading
spring (A)

355002425B

Idler gear
(B)

355002446A

Loading
spring (C)

12

12

12

12

0-36

0-38

0-39

1
4

0-4

0-40

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

Part No.

Part name

Qty./unit

Total
qty.

Processing rack No.


1

Inlet
rack

Crossover rack No.


2

Squ.
rack

Dry
rack

Page

385001006A

Filter retainer
(temperature control bath)

3850A2202A

Anti-evaporation cover

0-42

385002212B

Helical
wheel (left)

30

0-42

396033127B

Helical
wheel (right)

0-43

35

0-46

355002232A Worm gear

0-41

355002227A

Thrust
washer

0-47

355002260A

Loading
spring

25

0-48

355002230A

Loading
spring

25

0-49

355002232A

Loading
spring 121

10

0-50

355002229B Bearing

60

12

12

12

12

12

0-51

355002251A Gear (E)

15

0-52

355002213A Gear

15

0-52

355002230B Bearing

15

0-53

355002234B Bearing

10

0-54

Three-yearly Replacement Parts

Part No.

Part name

Qty./unit

Total
qty.

Processing rack No.


1

385002401A

Rubber
roller (A)

385002432A

Rubber
roller (B)

385002445B

Loading
spring (B)

16

Inlet
rack

Crossover rack No.


2

0-5

Squ.
rack

Dry
rack

Page

0-55

0-56
0-57

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

Miscellaneous Parts

Part No.

Part name

Qty./unit

Total
qty.

Processing rack No.


1

Crossover rack No.

Inlet
rack

385002412A
385002413A

Hook

10

270002016C
270002018C

Diffuser film
light guide

Input station
(must be cleaned every three months).

0-6

Squ.
rack

Dry
rack

Page

0-58
0-59

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

Drawing showing yearly replacement parts


<Inlet rack>

385002426A
Bearing

385002426A
Bearing

0-7

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

<Crossover rack>

385002426A
Bearing

385002432A
Rubber roller (B)

385002426A
Bearing

385002426A
Bearing

385002426A
Bearing

0-8

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

<Squeeze rack>

385002426A
Bearing

385002407B
Water
absorbing

385002416B
Idler gear

385002426A
Bearing

385002426A
Bearing

3850A2408C
Idler gear assembly
385002426A
Bearing

385002426A
Bearing

0-9

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

<Drying rack>

385002215B
Gear
(2 on squeegee drive)

251002602A
Roller (C)
(1 at entrance to rack)

0-10

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

Drawing showing two-yearly replacement parts


<Temperature control bath>

385001006A
Filter retainer
(temperature
control tank)

0-11

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

<Processor>
AAAA90200171
Timing belt
(processor
drive shaft)

0-12

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

<Processing rack>

Processing rack No. 1: A+B


Processing rack No. 2 4: A+C
Processing rack No. 5: A

355002635B
Gear (C)

A
355002234B
Bearing

355002221B
Idler gear (A)

355002230A
Loading spring
(5 per rack)
355002260A
Loading spring
(5 per rack)

3850002216B
Gear

396033127B
Helical wheel (right)

AAAA90100184
Bearing

AAAA90100185
Bearing

355002635B
Gear (C)
385002212B
Helical wheel (left)
(6 per rack)

355002221B
Idler gear (A)

355002232A
Worm gear
355002251B
Gear (E)

355002234B
Bearing
385002230B
Bearing
355002232A
Worm gear

355002229A
Bearing
(36 per rack)
385002213A
Gear

251602213A
Loading spring 121
385002214A
Gear

355002227A
Thrust
washer
385002230B
Bearing
355002234B
Bearing

251602213A
Loading spring 121

0-13

385002215B
Gear
(12 per rack)

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

<Processing rack (guides)>

3850A2202A
Anti-evapo- ration coverAAssy

0-14

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

<Inlet rack>

355002444A
Loading spring (A)

385002215B
Gear

385002216B
Gear
355002444A
Loading spring (A)

0-15

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

<Crossover rack>

255002425B
Idler gear (B)

385002216B
Gear

385002216B
Gear

385002216B
Gear

0-16

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

<Squeeze rack>

385002215B
Gear

385002216B
Gear

355002446A
Loading spring (C)

355002446A
Loading spring (C)
355002444A
Loading spring (A)

355002444A
Loading spring (A)

0-17

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

Drawing showing three-yearly replacement parts


<Inlet rack>

385002401A
Rubber roller (A)

0-18

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

<Crossover rack>

255002445B
Loading spring (B)

255002445B
Loading spring (B)

0-19

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

<Squeeze rack>

385002401A
Rubber roller (A)

385002432A
Rubber roller (B)

0-20

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

How to replace yearly replacement parts


10-1. Procedure for replacing bearing (385002426A)
Before starting your work, be sure to turn off the power for your personal safety.
Consult the drawings in pages 0-7 to 0-21 for the exact location of the part.
1 Replace roller bearings a on the inlet rack,
crossover racks, and squeeze rack. (Although
one crossover rack is shown right as an
example, you can replace the parts on the
other racks in the same manner.)

2 The bearings are secured with either retaining


rings (plastic) b or gears c as shown in the
figure.
Read "Point" in page 0-2 for the details on
removing a retaining ring and a gear.
3 After changing the bearing, reattach the parts
where they were in the reverse orders of the
steps performed for removal.

b
c

NOTE
No retaining rings must be recycled.

0-21

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

10-2. Procedure for replacing water-absorbing roller (385002407B)


Before starting your work, be sure to turn off the power for your personal safety.
Consult the drawings in pages 0-7 to 0-21 for the exact location of the part.
1 Take off the squeeze rack.

2 Take off turn guide a.


3 Remove the bearing and gear holding waterabsorbing roller b by consulting "10-1.
Procedure for replacing bearing."
4 Take off and replace the water-absorbing
roller.
5 After changing the water-absorbing roller,
reattach the parts where they were in the
reverse order of the steps performed for
removal.

10-3. Procedure for replacing idler gear (385002416B)


Before starting your work, be sure to turn off the power for your personal safety.
Consult the drawings in pages 0-7 to 0-21 for the exact location of the part.
1 Take off the squeeze rack.

2 Remove the cir-clip holding idler gear


assembly a.
(Read Point in page 0-2 for the details on
removal.)
3 Replace idler gear a.
4 After changing the idler gear, reattach the
parts where they were in the reverse order of
the steps performed for removal.

0-22

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

10-4. Procedure for replacing idler gear assembly (3850A2408C)


Before starting your work, be sure to turn off the power for your personal safety.
Consult the drawings in pages 0-7 to 0-21 for the exact location of the part.
1 Take off the squeeze rack.
2 Remove the cir-clips holding idler gear
assembly a.
(Read Point in page 0-2 for the details on
removal.)
3 Replace the idler gear assembly.
4 After changing idler gear assembly, reattach
the parts where they were in the reverse order
of the steps performed for removal.

10-5. Procedure for replacing gear (385002215B)


Before starting your work, be sure to turn off the power for your personal safety.
Consult the drawings in pages 0-7 to 0-21 for the exact location of the part.
1 Take off the drying rack.
2 Replace gears a.
3 Read Point in page 0-2 for the details on
removal.

4 After changing the gear, reattach the parts


where they were in the reverse order of the
steps performed for removal.

0-23

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

10-6. Procedure for replacing roller (C) (251602602A)


Before starting your work, be sure to turn off the power for your personal safety.
Consult the drawings in pages 0-7 to 0-21 for the exact location of the part.
1 Take off the drying rack.
2 Unlock the claws by pushing the springs
inward to the right and left sides, and take off
guide (1) a.

NOTE
When attaching guide (1), make sure
that it is locked securely into position.

3 Remove four screws b holding duct a.


4 Take off duct a.

5 Take off the drying nozzle by pushing two


drying nozzle claws a and b inward (one at
the top and the other at the bottom).

NOTE
When attaching the drying nozzle, make
sure that the retaining claws are locked
securely into position.

0-24

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

6 Remove helical wheel a by opening the claws


in the shaft hole outward.
7 Remove loading spring b and bearing c.

8 Take out the inner rubber roller through the


hole from which you removed the drying
nozzle.
Take the outer roller off and outside.
9 After changing the roller, reattach the parts
where they were in the reverse order of the
steps performed for removal.

NOTE
Remember to check the roller ratchets.

0-25

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

How to replace two-yearly replacement parts


10-7. Procedure for replacing timing belt (rack drive shaft) (AAAA90200171)
Before starting your work, be sure to turn off the power for your personal safety.
Consult the drawings in pages 0-7 to 0-21 for the exact location of the part.
1 Remove three screws a.
2 Take off timing belt cover b.

3 Loosen three screws c after marking their


positions.
4 Lift up motor b, and disconnect timing belt e
from sprocket f.
5 After changing the timing belt, reattach the
parts where they were in the reverse order of
the steps performed for removal.

6 Adjust the timing belt tension by consulting the


next page.

d
c

0-26

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

Specifications for Adjusting Timing Belt Tension

0.

.5

4
d:

Be

Standard value
(for a guide)

Partly tighten motor, apply approximately a 4.9 N (0.5 kgf)


load to it (using a weight or other similar instrument), and
fully tighten it.
Hand-operated shaft mount
(frame) square hole.

4.9 N (0.5 kgf) load.

Load: 9.80.49 N (10.05)

Direction of rotation of
driving

Motor-holding screw

Motor-holding screw

0-27

Direction of application of load to belt.

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

10-8. Procedure for replacing gear (385002214A)


Before starting your work, be sure to turn off the power for your personal safety.
Consult the drawings in pages 0-7 to 0-21 for the exact location of the part.
1 Take off the processing rack.
2 Remove screw a from the inside, and take off
bearing holder b.

Remove this screw


to take off the
bearing holder.

3 By pressing anti-evaporation cover c against


one of the side plates, let the two pins out of
the groove in the side plate.

NOTE
Only when you take off the P1 rack antievaporation cover, remove the driving shaft
side inlet shaft using an Allen wrench as
illustrated below.
Inlet shaft

0-28

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

4 By pushing claw d, take off anti-evaporation


cover e.

NOTE

When removing the anti-evaporation cover,


pull it out straight. Pulling it out obliquely will
break the claws.

5 Take off gears f.


(Read Point in page 0-2 for the details on
removal.) Also remove the bearings and
loading springs.

6 Move embossed roller (A) g and roller (E) h


toward you, and take off gear i.

7 After changing the gears, reattach the parts


where they were in the reverse order of the
steps performed for removal.

0-29

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

10-9. Procedure for replacing gear (385002216B)


Before starting your work, be sure to turn off the power for your personal safety.
Consult the drawings in pages 0-7 to 0-21 for the exact location of the part.
Processing rack No. 1
1 Take off processing rack No. 1.

2 Remove screw a from the inside, and take off


bearing holder b.

Remove this screw


to take off the
bearing holder.

3 Remove the cir-clip holding gear c.


(Read Point in page 0-2 for the details on
removal.)
4 After changing the gear, reattach the parts
where they were in the reverse order of the
steps performed for removal.

0-30

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

Inlet rack
1 Take off the inlet rack.
2 Remove gear a.
(Read Point in page 0-2 for the details on
removal.)
3 After changing the gear, reattach the parts
where they were in the reverse order of the
steps performed for removal.

Crossover rack
1 Take off the crossover rack.
2 Remove gear a.
(Read Point in page 0-2 for the details on
removal.)
3 After changing the gear, reattach the parts
where they were in the reverse order of the
steps performed for removal.

a
a

Squeeze rack
1 Take off the squeeze rack.
2 Remove gear a.
(Read Point in page 0-2 for the details on
removal.)
3

After changing the gear, reattach the parts


where they were in the reverse order of the
steps performed for removal.

0-31

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

10-10. Procedure for replacing idler gear (C) (355002635B)


Before starting your work, be sure to turn off the power for your personal safety.
Consult the drawings in pages 0-7 to 0-21 for the exact location of the part.
1 Take off the processing rack.
2 Remove the cir-clip holding idler gear (C) a
on the inside of the processing rack.
(Read Point in page 0-2 for the details on
removal.)

3 After changing the idler gear, reattach the


parts where they were in the reverse order of
the steps performed for removal.

0-32

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

10-11. Procedure for replacing idler gear (A) (355002221B)


Before starting your work, be sure to turn off the power for your personal safety.
Consult the drawings in pages 0-7 to 0-21 for the exact location of the part.
1 Take off the P1 rack.
2 Remove screw a from the inside, and take off
bearing holder b.

Remove this screw


to take off the

3 Remove the cir-clip holding idler gear (A) c.


(Read Point in page 0-2 for the details on
removal.)

bearing holder.

4 After changing the idler gear, reattach the


parts where they were in the reverse order of
the steps performed for removal.

b
c

0-33

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

10-12. Procedure for replacing bearing (AAAA90100184)


Before starting your work, be sure to turn off the power for your personal safety.
Consult the drawings in pages 0-7 to 0-21 for the exact location of the part.
1 Take off the P1 rack.
2 Remove the screw from the inside, and take
off bearing holder a.
3 Take off idler gear (A) b by consulting "10-11.
Procedure for replacing idler gear (A)."

a
b

4 Replace bearing c in the hole in the shaft to


which idler gear (C) was attached previously.
5 After changing the bearing, reattach the parts
where they were in the reverse order of the
steps performed for removal.

Remove this screw to


take off the bearing
holder.

0-34

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

10-13. Procedure for replacing bearing (AAAA90100185)


Before starting your work, be sure to turn off the power for your personal safety.
Consult the drawings in pages 0-7 to 0-21 for the exact location of the part.
1 Take off the P1 rack.
2 Remove the screw from the inside, and take
off bearing holder a.

3 Replace bearing b attached to the bearing


holder.

4 After changing the bearing, reattach the parts


where they were in the reverse order of the
steps performed for removal.

NOTE
The bearing must be attached in the right
direction. Attach it correctly by consulting the
figure below.

0-35

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

10-14. Procedure for replacing gear (385002215B)


Before starting your work, be sure to turn off the power for your personal safety.
Consult the drawings in pages 0-7 to 0-21 for the exact location of the part.
Processing rack
1 Take off the processing rack.
2 Remove gear a.
(Read Point in page 0-2 for the details on
removal.)

a
3 After changing the gear, reattach the parts
where they were in the reverse order of the
steps performed for removal.

Inlet rack
1 Take off the inlet rack.
2 Remove gear a.
(Read Point in page 0-2 for the details on
removal.)

3 After changing the gear, reattach the parts


where they were in the reverse order of the
steps performed for removal.

0-36

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

Squeeze rack

1 Take off the squeeze rack.

a
2 Remove gear a.
(Read Point in page 0-2 for the details on
removal.)
3

After changing the gear, reattach the parts


where they were in the reverse order of the
steps performed for removal.

0-37

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

10-15. Procedure for replacing loading spring (A) (355002444A)


Before starting your work, be sure to turn off the power for your personal safety.
Consult the drawings in pages 0-7 to 0-21 for the exact location of the part.
Inlet rack
1 Take off the inlet rack.
2 Remove gear a.
(Read Point in page 0-2 for the details on
removal.)
3 Disconnect loading spring b.

4 After changing the loading spring, reattach the


parts where they were in the reverse order of
the steps performed for removal.

Squeeze rack
1 Take off the squeeze rack.
2 Remove gears c.
(Read Point in page 0-2 for the details on
removal.)
3 Disconnect loading springs d.

4 Also disconnect loading springs e on the


other side of the rack.
5 After changing the loading springs, reattach
the parts where they were in the reverse order
of the steps performed for removal.

0-38

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

10-16. Procedure for replacing idler gear (B) (355002425B)


Before starting your work, be sure to turn off the power for your personal safety.
Consult the drawings in pages 0-7 to 0-21 for the exact location of the part.
Crossover rack
1 Take off the crossover rack.
2 Remove gear a.
(Read Point in page 0-2 for the details on
removal.)
3 After changing the gear, reattach the parts
where they were in the reverse order of the
steps performed for removal.

0-39

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

10-17. Procedure for replacing loading spring (C) (355002446A)


Before starting your work, be sure to turn off the power for your personal safety.
Consult the drawings in pages 0-7 to 0-21 for the exact location of the part.
1 Take off the squeegeeing rack.
2 Open the gear a retaining claws outward, and
take off gear a. (Read "Point" in page 0-2 for
the details on removal.)
3 Remove loading springs (C) b.

a
a

4 Also disconnect loading spring (C) d on the


other side of the rack.
5 After changing the loading spring, reattach the
parts where they were in the reverse order of
the steps performed for removal.

0-40

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

10-18. Procedure for replacing filter retainer (temperature control bath) (385001006A)
Before starting your work, be sure to turn off the power for your personal safety.
Consult the drawings in pages 0-7 to 0-21 for the exact location of the part.
1 Take off the top cover on the processor.
2 Turn the filer shaft until the two arrows in the
stickers, one on filter unit a and the other on
the tank, face each other.

a
3 Pull out filter unit a slowly.
(Be careful not to jerk the filer unit, or the
solution may spill out and cause contamination.)

4 Replace filter holder b


5 After changing the filter holder, reattach the
parts where they were in the reverse order of
the steps performed for removal.

P3-3
P3-2
P3-1
P2
P1

0-41

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

10-19. Procedure for replacing anti-evaporation cover (3850A2202A)


Before starting your work, be sure to turn off the power for your personal safety.
Consult the drawings in pages 0-7 to 0-21 for the exact location of the part.
1 Take off the processing rack.

a
2 Press anti-evaporation cover a against one of
the side plates, and let the two pins out of the
groove in the other side plate.
3 After changing the anti- evaporation cover,
reattach the parts where they were in the
reverse order of the steps performed for
removal.

NOTE
Only when you take off the P1 rack antievaporation cover, remove the driving shaft
side inlet shaft using an Allen wrench as
illustrated below.
Inlet shaft.

10-20. Procedure for replacing helical wheel (left) (385002212B)


Before starting your work, be sure to turn off the power for your personal safety.
Consult the drawings in pages 0-7 to 0-21 for the exact location of the part.
1 Take off the processing rack.
2 Remove helical wheels (left) a.
(Read Point in page 0-2 for the details on
removal.)
3 After changing the helical wheels, reattach the
parts where they were in the reverse order of
the steps performed for removal.

0-42

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

10-21. Procedure for replacing helical wheel (right) (396033127B)


Before starting your work, be sure to turn off the power for your personal safety.
Consult the drawings in pages 0-7 to 0-21 for the exact location of the part.
1 Take off the processing rack.
2 By pushing claw a, take off anti-evaporation
cover b.

a
b

NOTE
When removing the anti-evaporation cover,
pull it out straight. Pulling it out obliquely will
break the claws.

3 Take off the various guides around bearing c


(halfway down the rack) in advance, so you
can gain easy access to the two screws
holding the bearing.

4 Remove two screws d to set bearing c


(halfway down the rack) free.

0-43

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

5 Take off U-turn guide e at the bottom of the


processing rack.

6 Remove four screws f holding the rack


frame, and take off the frame.

f
7 Remove two screws g holding the bearing (at
the very bottom), and take off the driving shaft.

0-44

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

8 Remove bearing and spacer h.

9 Firmly push down helical wheel (right) i with


built-in torque limiter, and pull out pin j.
Replace the helical wheel (right). But, while
you do this, grease the wheel according to the
following procedure.

!0 Replace the helical wheel (right). While doing


this, apply grease to inner surface k.
!1 Attach the parts as they were before in the
reverse order of the steps performed for
removal.

0-45

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

10-22. Procedure for replacing worm gear (355002232A)


Before starting your work, be sure to turn off the power for your personal safety.
Consult the drawings in pages 0-7 to 0-21 for the exact location of the part.
1 Take off the processing rack.
2 Remove the driving shaft according to "10-21.
Procedure for replacing helical wheel (right)
(396033127B)."
3 Remove self-tapping screw b holding worm
gears a, and remove the worm gears.
4 After changing the worm gears, reattach the
parts where theywere in the reverse order of
the steps performed for removal.

0-46

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

10-23. Procedure for replacing thrust washer (355002227A)


Before starting your work, be sure to turn off the power for your personal safety.
Consult the drawings in pages 0-7 to 0-21 for the exact location of the part.
1 Take off the processing rack.
2 Remove the driving shaft according to "10-21.
Procedure for replacing helical wheel (right)
(396033127B)."
3 Remove bearing a, and remove thrust washer
b.
4 After changing the thrust washer, reattach the
parts where they were in the reverse order of
the steps performed for removal.

0-47

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

10-24. Procedure for replacing loading spring (355002260A)


Before starting your work, be sure to turn off the power for your personal safety.
Consult the drawings in pages 0-7 to 0-21 for the exact location of the part.
1 Take off the processing rack.
2 Remove gear a first.
(Read Point in page 0-2 for the details on
removal.) Disconnect the loading spring next.
3 After changing the loading spring, reattach the
parts where they were in the reverse order of
the steps performed for removal.

0-48

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

10-25. Procedure for replacing loading spring (355002230A)


Before starting your work, be sure to turn off the power for your personal safety.
Consult the drawings in pages 0-7 to 0-21 for the exact location of the part.
1 Take off the processing rack.
2 When the loading spring is fitted with a gear,
remove gear a first.
(Read Point in page 0-2 for the details on
removal.) Disconnect the loading spring next.
3 When the loading gear is fitted only with
bearing b, disconnect the loading spring with
the bearing in place.

4 After changing the loading spring, reattach the


parts where they were in the reverse order of
the steps performed for removal.

0-49

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

10-26. Procedure for replacing loading spring 121 (251602213A)


Before starting your work, be sure to turn off the power for your personal safety.
Consult the drawings in pages 0-7 to 0-21 for the exact location of the part.
1 Take off the processing rack.
2 Remove gears a first.
(Read Point in page 0-2 for the details on
removal.) Disconnect the loading springs next.
3 After changing the loading springs, reattach
the parts where they were in the reverse order
of the steps performed for removal.

0-50

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

10-27. Procedure for replacing bearing (355002229A)


Before starting your work, be sure to turn off the power for your personal safety.
Consult the drawings in pages 0-7 to 0-21 for the exact location of the part.
1 Take off the processing rack.
2 Remove gears a.
(Read Point in page 0-2 for the details on
removal.)

3 Disconnect loading springs b.


4 Remove bearings c.
5 After changing the bearings, reattach the parts
where they were in the reverse order of the
steps performed for removal.

NOTE
To take off the driving shaft side gears, you
need to take off the driving shaft in advance.
For the details on how to take off the driving
shaft, read "10-21. Procedure for replacing
helical wheel (right) (396033127B)."

b
c

0-51

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

10-28. Procedure for replacing gear E (355002251A)


Before starting your work, be sure to turn off the power for your personal safety.
Consult the drawings in pages 0-7 to 0-21 for the exact location of the part.
1 Take off the processing rack.
2 Remove gears a.
(Read Point in page 0-2 for the details on
removal.)

3 Remove gears (E) b.


(Read Point in page 0-2 for the details on
removal.)

4 After changing the gears, reattach the parts


where they were in the reverse order of the
steps performed for removal.

10-29. Procedure for replacing gear (355002213A)


Before starting your work, be sure to turn off the power for your personal safety.
Consult the drawings in pages 0-7 to 0-21 for the exact location of the part.
1 Take off the processing rack.
2 Remove gears a.
(Read Point in page 0-2 for the details on
removal.)
3 After changing the gears, reattach the parts
where they were in the reverse order of the
steps performed for removal.

0-52

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

10-30. Procedure for replacing bearing (355002230A)


Before starting your work, be sure to turn off the power for your personal safety.
Consult the drawings in pages 0-7 to 0-21 for the exact location of the part.
1 Take off the processing rack.
2 Take off the driving shaft and worm gears
according to "10-22. Procedure for replacing
worm gears (335002232A)."
3 Remove bearings a.
4 After changing the bearings, reattach the parts
where they were in the reverse order of the
steps performed for removal.

0-53

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

10-31. Procedure for replacing bearing (355002234B)


Before starting your work, be sure to turn off the power for your personal safety.
Consult the drawings in pages 0-7 to 0-21 for the exact location of the part.
1 Take off the processing rack.
2 Take off the driving shaft and worm gears
according to "10-22. Procedure for replacing
worm gears (355002232A)."
3 Remove bearings a.
4 After changing the bearings, reattach the parts
where they were in the reverse order of the
steps performed for removal.

0-54

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

How to replace three-yearly replacement parts


10-32. Procedure for replacing rubber roller (A) (385002401A)
Before starting your work, be sure to turn off the power for your personal safety.
Consult the drawings in pages 0-7 to 0-21 for the exact location of the part.
1 Take off the squeegeeing rack.
2 Open the gear a retaining claws outward, and
remove gear a. Read "Point" in page 0-2 for
the details on removing a gear.
3 Remove bearing b and loading spring c.

4 Using long nose pliers, remove retaining ring


d on the other side. Read "Point" in page 0-2
for the details on how to remove a retaining
ring.

e
f

5 Remove bearing e and loading spring f.

6 Pull out rubber rollers (A) g, and replace


them.

7 After replacing the rubber rollers, attach the


various parts as they were before in the
reverse order order of the steps performed for
removal.

NOTE
No retaining rings must be recycled.

0-55

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

10-33. Procedure for replacing rubber roller (B) (385002432A)


Before starting your work, be sure to turn off the power for your personal safety.
Consult the drawings in pages 0-7 to 0-21 for the exact location of the part.
1 Take off the squeegeeing rack.
2 Open the gear a retaining claws outward, and
remove gear a. Read "Point" in page 0-2 for
the details on removing a gear.
3 Remove bearing b and loading spring c.

4 Using long nose pliers, remove retaining ring


d on the other side. Read "Point" in page 0-2
for the details on how to remove a retaining
ring.

5 Remove bearing e and loading spring f.

6 Pull out rubber rollers (B) g, and replace


them.

7 After replacing the rubber rollers, attach the


various parts as they were before in the
reverse order order of the steps performed for
removal.

NOTE
No retaining rings must be recycled.

0-56

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

10-34. Procedure for replacing loading spring (B) (355002445B)


Before starting your work, be sure to turn off the power for your personal safety.
Consult the drawings in pages 0-7 to 0-21 for the exact location of the part.
1 Take off the crossover rack.
2 Remove gears a.
(Read Point in page 0-2 for the details on
removal.)
3 Disconnect loading springs (B)b.
4 After changing the loading springs, reattach
the parts where they were in the reverse order
of the steps performed for removal.

b
b
a

0-57

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

Miscellaneous Parts
10-35. Procedure for replacing hooks (385002413A and 385002412A)
Before starting your work, be sure to turn off the power for your personal safety.

1 Take off the entrance rack or crossover rack.


(A crossover rack is shown here for illustration,
but the entrance rack hooks can be replaced
by the same procedure.)

2 Remove hook a. Because it is held very


tightly, insert a screwdriver into the gap
between hook and rack, and remove the hook
by using the screwdriver as if to open the gap
wider.
3 To attach the hook, put the hook bump into
one hole, and force the other end in.

0-58

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

10-36. Procedure for cleaning diffuser film (top) (270002016C) and light
guide (top side) (270002018C)
Before starting your work, be sure to turn off the power for your personal safety.

1 Open the front cover at the lower part of Film


Scanner.

2 Completely loosen both 1. Pull the green


handle forward, and guide the light source by
hand when removing.
3 Loosen 2.
Rotate 3 90.
Completely loosen both 4.
Push the light source cover a inwards and
remove it.
4 Clean diffuser film (a) and light guide (b) using
the Konica-recommended cleaner. Insert the
diffuser film with the cut edge first and left
(smooth side up).

5 After cleaning the diffuser and light guide,


attach the various parts as they were before in
the order of the steps performed for removal.

b
a

0-59

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

NOTE

Insert direction
Cut side

Set the diffuser film with the cut edge


in the same direction as the cut light
guide edge (smooth side up).

Cut side

Diffusion film
Remove direction

0-60

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

11. APPLICATION DATA BACKUP AND RELOADING PROCEDURES


11-1. Backing up Data
NOTE
- Normally, data used in the application is automatically backed up at the previous day and the
day before previous day.
To be prepared for a hard disk crush or the other worst cases, backing up data on regular basis
is highly recommended.
This section describes the procedure for backing up information on to floppy disk drive A.
Two 1.4MB-formatted empty FDs (for input and for printer) are required.
Use the same procedure for backing up information on to another external drive (medium).

11-1-1. Input station (When backing up the data to the A drive on the FD drive:)
(1) From the input station home screen, select [Setup], [15 Data management], and then [151
Creat backup data].
(2) Follow the procedure shown below on the data backup display.
Set a 3.5-inch FD (1.4MB formatted) in the FD drive.
1 Select [Input station] tag.
2 Select [a: drive] on [backup destination selection] list box.
3 Select [No] on compression selection.
4 Uncheck the boxes shown below using the scroll bar on the Equipment data item.
(Because data cannot be stored in one FD)
- 135 AFC carrier setting
- 240 AFC carrier setting
- Universal film carrier setting
5 Click [Create backup data] button.
1

1-1

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

6 Click [Yes] on the backup start confirmation display to execute the backup.

NOTE
- The DS-1000 application data is backed up in a folder, A:Backup.

1-2

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

11-1-2. Backing up the printer data (When backing up the data to the A drive on the FD drive:)
(1) From the input station home screen, select [Setup], [15 Data management], and then [151
Creat backup data].
(2) Follow the procedure shown below on the data backup display.
Set a 3.5-inch FD (1.4MB formatted) in the FD drive of the input station
1 Select [Printer unit] tag.
2 Select [a: drive] on [backup destination selection] list box.
3 Select [Yes] on compression selection.
4 Confirm the all boxes are checked.
5 Click [Create backup data] button.

6 Click [Yes] on the backup start confirmation display to execute the backup.

NOTE
- The DS-1000 application data is backed up in a folder, A:Backupdp1.

1-3

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

<For the versions up to V1.02, the procedure in (3) below is necessary>


(3) Carry out the following operation on the Reading and writing of inter-pixel correction value
screen of the printer.
Set the FD used in item (2) in the FD drive of the printer.
1 Select Mode2.maintain4.PrinterDown arrow()9.Read/Write pixel correction
form the printer LCD panel.
2 Execute Write processing by pressing "Write to FD".
3 When Write processing is completed, return control to the home screen by pressing the
Return button.
4 Remove the FD from the FD drive of the printer.

1-4

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

11-2. Retrieving Data Backed up


NOTE
- This part will explain the steps for retrieving the data backed up in the previous part and for
rewriting the data to a folder which is used on the normal application operation.
The same procedure can be used for restoring data from another external drive (medium).

11-2-1. Retrieval the data backed up from the input station


(When retrieving the data from the A drive on the FD drive:)

(1) From the input station home screen, select [15 Data management], and then [152 Data
restore].
(2) Follow the procedure shown below on the data call display.
1 Select [Input station] tag.
2 Select [a: drive] on [backup destination selection] list box.
3 A list of the data when the files were backed up is displayed on [Select file] column.
(When two or more data are backed up, select the desired list from two or more lists
displayed.)
4 After confirming that the date of data is right, click [Access file list] button.
5 Click [Restore] button.
1

When the desired file is not


found in the selected drive, the
error message will appear.

1-5

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

6 Click [Yes] on the backup start confirmation display to execute the backup.

NOTE
- The data is copied from the A:Backup folder to the folder (now) of the DS-1000
application for restoration. Caution is necessary for execution of the program since
data is overwritten to the now folder currently being used.

(3) Restarting the input station


1 Click [Quite] button on the home screen to quite the application.
2 Turn the input station breaker to off, and wait until the shut down process finishes.
3 Turn the input station breaker to on to restart the input station.
*After restarting the input station is completed, the data retrieved is operable.

1-6

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

11-2-2. Retrieval the data backed up from the printer


(When retrieving the data from the A drive on the FD drive:)
(1) From the input station home screen, select [15 Data management], and then [152 Data
restore].
(2) Follow the procedure shown below on the data call display.
1 Select [Printer unit] tag.
2 Select [a: drive] on [backup destination selection] list box.
3 A list of the data when the files were backed up is displayed on [Select file] column.
(When two or more data are backed up, select the desired list from two or more lists
displayed.)
4 After confirming that the date of data is right, click [Access file list] button.
5 Click [Restore] button.
1

When the desired file is not


found in the selected drive, the
error message will appear.

6 Click [Yes] on the backup start confirmation display to execute the backup.

NOTE
- Data is copied for recovery via network, from A:Backupdp1 folder to the data folder
(now) of DS-1000 application. Caution is necessary for execution of the program since
data is overwritten to the now folder currently being used.

1-7

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

<For the versions up to V1.02, the procedure in (3) below is necessary>


(3) Carry out the following operation on the Reading and writing of inter-pixel correction value
screen of the printer.
Set the FD that was backed up in Section 11-1-2. to the FD drive of the printer.
1 Select Mode 2.Maintenance 4.Printer unit 9.Reading and writing of inter-pixel
correction value from the printer LCD panel.
2 Execute Write processing by pressing "Load on to FD".
3 After loading processing is completed, return control to the home screen by pressing
the Return button.
4 Remove the FD from the FD drive of the printer.

(4) Restarting the printer


1 Press the pause button to switch the pause display.
2 Press the restart button.
*After restarting the printer is completed, the data retrieved is operable.

1-8

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

12. R1 SUPER VERSION UP PROCEDURE FOR DS-1000 & DP-1000


[Purpose]
1. To make troubleshooting for the current software version.
2. To install the option software such as CD-R writing, Digital-ICE and Red eye correction. But the
hardware key is needed to use the functions.
[Tools]
CD-ROM : R1 Super DS-1000 System E V1.03R01 (E)
CD-ROM : R1 Super DP-1000 System J/E V1.03R01
[Version up Procedure Flow]
1. Pre-check before version up

1) Print out for master chart, head calibration, and various print
2) Data backup (Input station and Printer)

2. Input Station Application software version up

1) DS-1000 System Software decompression

2) Version up of ES-2200 Driver

3) Version up of AFC firmware

3. Printer Application software version up procedure

1) Version of DP-1000 Software

2) Version up of Printer-CPU
3) Version up of LCD Information
4) Version up of Maintenance chart data for DP-1000

4. Post-check after version up


1) Confirmation of version (Input station, Printer)
2) Film scanner setup
3) Head calibration, 4) Master channel setup, 5) Various print
6) Data backup Input station

2-1

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

[Procedure Details for upgrading DS-1000 & DP-1000]


1) Pre-check before version up
1) Print Master Channel test chart
Mode: 1. Setup 12 Individual setup 125 Correct master channel color
Print master channel chart for checking after version up.
2) Print Head Calibration test chart
Mode: 1. Setup 12 Individual setup 124 Head calibration
Print Head Calibration chart for checking after version up.
3) Confirm various print:
Print sample prints for checking after version up.
(e.g.)
135 negative film: 3R or 4R
Digital still camera: 3R or 4R
Print to Print: 3R or 4R
4) Input Station data backup
a) 1.Setup 15 Manage data 151 Create backup data copy
b) Confirm that tag is Input Station
c) Check "Specify to which" is C:\.
d) Click Create backup copy button. Click the YES button on the message that appears.
(Backup folder will be created in C:\Temp folder.)
5) Printer data backup
e) 1.Setup 15 Manage data 151 Create backup data copy
f) Confirm that tag is printer
g) Check "Specify to which" is C:\.
h) Click Create backup copy button. Click the YES button on the message that appears.
(Backup folder will be created in C:\Temp folder.)
2) Input Station Application software version up
1) Quit Input Station Application Software
a) Click Quit button in home screen.
b) Click Quit button in closing screen.
c) If Post-operation check screen appears, click Cancel and quit.
2) Log on as the Administrator
a) "Ctrl"+"Alt"+"Del" to go to security of Windows.
b) Select "Log off"
c) Put "administrator" on User ID, and "konica" or no password on password
d) Click "OK".
3) Uncompress application file for DS-1000 System.
a) Double click "DS1000V103R01(E)" in the CD.
CD\DS1000V103R01E.EXE
Confirm target is C:\ and click OK button.
4) Setting for registry
a) Insert "R1 Super System V1.03R01(E)" CD to CD-ROM drive.
b) Open Explorer and Double click "r1Super.reg"
CD\Regset\ r1Super.reg
c) Click "OK" on the confirmation message. When the success message comes, the setting
is completed.
5) Login as Administrator
a) Display task bar by clicking on the "Windows" key on the full size keyboard.
b) From the taskbar, Select Start Shut down.
c) Select "Restart" and click OK button.
*Do not press "Shift" key during the PC is restoring.
d) Click Quit button in home screen.
e) Click Quit button in closing screen.
f) If Post-operation check screen appears, click cancel and quit.
g) Log on as the Administrator as usual way.

2-2

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

6) Recognition for CD-ROM.


a) Insert "R1 Super System V1.03R01(E)" CD to CD-ROM drive.
b) Double click CDROMEnable-E.
CD\ shortcut of CDROMEnable-E
When the error message comes up, click "OK" and retry it.

c) If the screen appears, adjust writing speed to meet the writing speed of work drive. (40X
speed in the following example)
Click "Previous".

7) ES-2200 Flat bed scanner driver version up


a) Refer to the procedure for ES-2200 scanner driver version up
8) Restart the Input station
a) Display task bar by clicking on the "Windows" key on the full size keyboard.
b) From the taskbar, Select Start Shut down.
c) Select "Restart" and click OK button.
9) AFC firmware version up
From the Home screen select Maintenance 26 Version up
a) Confirm that referring file is "AFC103r1.mot." If not, click Select file button and look for the
right one.

V103r1

b) Check AFC column and click download button.


(It takes around 6 min to complete.)

2-3

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

10) Delete the print size "4 x 11.5"


(Note: The print size "4 x 10" is installed instead of "4 x11.5" because the print size indication is
not correct on the current version.)
From the Home screen select 1. Setup 16 Set parameters 162 Set print size
a) Double click the "Normal Print" folder
b) Click "4 x 11.5".

c)
d)
e)
f)

Click "Delete".
Click "Yes" after the note message "NOTE-L175-0".
Click "Registration".
Click "Home" to go to home screen.

2-4

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

3) Printer Application software version up procedure


1) Printer software version up
a) Insert "R1 Super DP-1000 System J/E V1.03R01" CD to CD-ROM drive on the Input
station's PC.
b) From the Home screen, select 2.Maintenance 26 Version up
c) Select printer tab (DpXX)
*Don't press 'Shift' key during the PC is restarting.
d) Click "Select File" button in APL column to select download file and Click "Open".
CDPrinter v103r01.inf. (Because data is bulky, two files must be downloaded. Be sure to
selectcorrect files.)
e) Check "File load" and "Upgrade" In the APL column
f) Check "Upgrade" In the MCTL and Resource column.

v103r01.inf

v103r01.inf

g) Click "execution" button.


h) Once Start-up message "NOTE L191-0" appeared, click "Yes".
i) Once remote menu of application software version up appears, select "V103R01T1.inf" and
click start button.
(It takes around 3 min to complete.)
Click "Back" after finish upgrading.

v103r01.inf

2-5

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

j) Select Printer CPU (MCTL)


Choose "Mctl103R1.mot" and click start button.
(It takes around 6 min to complete.)
Click "Back" after finish upgrading.

Mctl103R1.mot

k) Select LCD Information


Choose "English" or "Japanese" and click start button.
(It takes around 2 min to complete.)
Click "Back" after finish upgrading.

2-6

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

l) Click "Back" button. It will review to the version up screen.


m) Select printer tab (DpXX)
n) Click "Select File" button in APL column to select download file and click "Open".
CD\Printer\ v103chart.inf
o) Check "File load" and "Upgrade" In the APL column.
p) Uncheck "Upgrade" in the MCTL and Resource column.
m

o
p

v103chart.inf

v103chart.inf

q) Click execution button.


r) Once Start-up message "NOTE L191-0" appeared, click "Yes".
s) Once remote menu of application software version up appears, select "V103chart.inf" and
click start button.
(It takes around 3 min to complete.)
t) Click "Back" button. And go to home screen.

v103chart.inf

2-7

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

4) Confirm the version by 1:Setup / F: Version display


1) Confirm the version on the screen for Input Unit.
The version display for Film scanner, FSDRV.DLL and MFS.SYS may be not the same as the
below image because of the original software version.
V0.67 for Film scanner, V0.21R02 for FSDRV.DLL and V0.07R00 for MFS.SYS are OK.

2) Confirm the version on the screen for Printer Unit.

3) Click "Home"

2-8

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

5) Post-check after version up


1) Film scanner setup
Mode: 1. Setup 12. Individual setup 122. Setup film scanner
a) Select carrier types in use.
b) Following display, set carrier and click Start setup button.

Follow display for other carriers if any.


2) Confirm various prints:
Print sample prints for checking after version up.
(e.g.)
135 negative film: 3R or 4R
Digital still camera: 3R or 4R
Print to Print: 3R or 4R
3) Print Head calibration
Mode: 1. Setup 12 Individual setup 124 Head calibration
(Note: The MUCS is new chart with gray color and 166mm length.)
4) Print Master channel setup
Mode: 1. Setup 12 Individual setup 125 Master channel setup
5) Input station data backup
a) Mode: 1. Setup 15 Manage data 151 Create backup data copy
b) Select Input Station tab.
c) Confirm that "Specify to which" is C:\ and D:\.
d) Click "Create backup copy" button.
(Backup folder will be created in C:\Temp and D:\Temp.)
6) Printer data backup
i) 1.Setup 15 Manage data 151 Create backup data copy
j) Confirm that tag is printer
k) Check "Specify to which" is C:\.
l) Click Create backup copy button. Click the YES button on the message that appears.
(Backup folder will be created in C:\Temp folder.)

2-9

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

13. EPSON ES-2200 UPGRADING PROCEDURE


13-1. EPSON ES-2200 driver "2.1.0.100" installation procedure
Background and Purpose:
The new model of EPSON ES-2200 flat bed scanner made in Indonesia will be released to use for R1
Super as the standard unit. This is the procedure to install the driver for it. This driver version is
compatible to the current model of ES-2200.
Note:
This driver upgrading must be done at the same timing as upgrading to V1.03R01 for DS-1000 to
prevent replacement trouble to the new one in future.
Procedure:
1 Log in as "Administrator", after quit the R1 application if started.
2 Right click on "My Computer" and select "Properties".
3 Select "HardWare" and click "Device Manager".
4 Double click on "Imaging devices", and right click on "EPSON Expression1680".

3-1

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

5 Select "Driver" and confirm "2.1.0.0" as "Driver Version". Click "Update Driver".

6 Click "Next".

7 Select "Search for a suitable driver" and Click "Next".

3-2

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

8 Select "Specify a location" and click "Next".

9 Click "Browse" and select "C:\drivers\EPSON\ES2200\English". Click "OK"

!0 Click "Next"

3-3

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

!1 Click "Yes"

!2 Click "Finish".

!3 Confirm the version "2.1.0.100" as "Driver Version". And click "close".

3-4

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

!4 Click "Yes" to restart the computer.

!5 Confirm the driver upgrading by "Print to Print" operation after R1 application restart.
Completed.

3-5

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

13-2. EPSON ES-2200 driver upgrading procedure from different


firmware version to "2.1.0.100"
When you replace the new flat bet scanner with the different firmware version from the current version,
the new flat bet scanner is not recognized on the system. This is the driver upgrading procedure for it.
Case 1;
In case you replace the flat bed scanner and log in as "Administrator", the below dialog comes on the
screen.
And click "Yes" to recognize the flatbed scanner.

The recognition is completed.


Case 2;
In case you replace the flat bet scanner and start R1 application (log in as R1), the new driver is
upgraded by the following procedure.
1 When you quit the R1 Application, the below message comes on the screen and click "OK".

2 Log in as "Administrator" after log off "r1".


3 Right click on "My Computer" on the desktop and select "Properties".
4 Select "HardWare" and click "Device Manager".

3-6

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

5 Select "EPSON SCANNER ES-2200 SCSI Processor Device" in "Imaging devices" and right click
on it.

6 Click "Update Driver".

7 Follow the step 6 in "EPSON ES-2200 driver install procedure"

3-7

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

14. FPGA PROGRAM WRITING PROCEDURE


[Tools]
1) PC which has Windows 95, 98, ME, 2000
or XP. And also has parallel I/F (36 pin)
2) ByteBlaster or equal product
Made by HuMANDATA LTD.(HDL)
3) R1-FPGA CD-ROM (2002.09.27. including
MAX+plusII free software. The latest version is
ASAP2_1021.exe: 14MB )
4) Download data files

[Installation Procedure]
1 Insert R1-FPGA CD-ROM to PC.
2 Double click ASAP2_1021.exe. After that it self-uncompresses automatically.
3 Installer of MAX+plusII automatically starts. Click "next" after indicating Welcome
message.
4 Software license agreement message is displayed. Click YES.
5 Input user name and company name on user information screen.
6 Mark "MAX+plusII ProgrammerOnlyFiles", "MAX+plusII Helps", "MAX+plusII ReadMeFile"
and select next.
(If you install from default folder to other folder, input the folder name which you want to
set.)
7 Check the folder name and select next on Select Program Folder screen.
After this procedure the installation is started automatically.
8 Make a shortcut icon of maxstart.exe by Explorer on home screen.

[Driver installation for ByteBlaster]


When the PC works on Windows 2000 or XP, the driver for ByteBlaster is required. Refer to
the "ByteBlaster driver installation procedure".

4-1

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

BYTEBLASTER Driver installation procedure


[In case of Windows XP]
1 Choose Control Panel (Windows Start menu). In the Control Panel window, double-clic
"Add Hardware" and click" Next". The Add Hardware wizard appears.

2 Click "Nex". Wait for a while.

4-2

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

3 In the first page of the Add Hardware wizard, select "Yes", Select "I have already
connected the hardware", and choose "Next".

4 Select "Add a new Hardware Device" and "Next".

5 Select "Install the hardware that I manually select from a list (M)" and choose "Next".

4-3

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

6 Select "Sound, video and game controllers" and click "Next".

7 Click "Have disk".

8 Specify the full directory path to the maxplus2driverswin2000 directory with


Browse (...) and click "OK".

4-4

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

9 Select "Altera ByteBlaster" and click "Next".

!0 Confirm "Altera ByteBlaster" and click "Next".

!1 Choose "Continue" in a software installation warning appears.

4-5

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

!2 When the window for "Need a file", select the same path in the step 8 again. And "OK"
and Click "Next".
!3 Click "Finish" to end.

!4 When prompted to restart your computer, choose "Yes".

[In case of Windows 2000]


Follow the procedure of Windows 2000.

[Setting]
1 Start MAX+plusII.
2 Select MAX+plusII/Programmer and shows the hardware setup.
3 Select ByteBlaster(MV) in the hardware type, and confirm the LPT1:(0x3478)

4-6

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

[Connection of ByteBlaster]
1 Connect ByteBlaster cable to the printer port of PC
[Procedure for HDC-PCI and HEAD-BUFF board ]
(1) Startup PC which MAX+plusII is installed.
(2) Copy all data at folder r1 from CD-ROM to c:.
(3) Turn on the machine.
(4) Quit the application by pressing the Idle/off. (Do not turn off the machine)
(5) Connect Byteplaster to each target connector. (Refer to note below.)
(6) Start MAX+plusII program.
(7) Select MAX+plusII/Programmer and start the programmer.
(8) Select JTAG/ Restore JCF, select JCR file to write.
JCF file name
1 HDC PCI board
c:r1hdc-pciv???.jcf (currently v131)
2 HEAD-BUFF board c:r1head-buffv???.jcf (currently v11)
Confirm File name, Device selection and Checksum value.

target connector
MCN2 on HDC-PCI board
HBCN6 on HEAD-BUFF board

(9) Once you click "Program" button, it starts writing. (Program Verify)

Start button

(10) Once OK is displayed, disconnect ByteBlaster from circuit board and power down the
target circuit board.

4-7

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

Location of connectors at each board (Confirm #1 pin on board first and set the
reverse triangle mark near brown line to #1 pin on board)
1) HDC-PCI

MCN2

DIPsw

MCN2

#1 pin

HDC-PCI board

2) HEAD-BUF
HBCN6
HEAD-BUF board

#1 pin

DIPsw

4-8

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

15. DS-1000 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE TO V1.03R01 BY APPLICATION CD-ROM


Note:
There are 4 types of PC for DS-1000. When you install the software, use the proper
application CD as shown below.

Part Number of PC

PC ID No. Applicable Application CD-ROM

Japanese 270087001C

IJC*

DS-1000 Application J IJC*

English 270287001C

IEC*

DS-1000 Application E IEC*

Japanese 270087004A (New Type)

IJ2A*

DS-1000 Application J IJ2A*

English 270287002A (New Type)

IE2A*

DS-1000 Application E IE2A*

PC ID No. is mentioned on the lower part of front panel of the PC.

1. Tools
1) DS-1000 Application E V1.0301E CD-ROM 1/2 & 2/2 (2 disks)
2) DS-1000 System E V1.03R01E CD-ROM (1 disk)
2. Software Installation flow for V1.03R01
1. Preparation

. Software installation

. Upgrading of film scanner driver

. Setting of CDR drive recognition

. Upgrading of application for Input station

Upgrading of carrier firmware

. Post check after upgrading

Confirmation of version
Film scanner setup

5-1

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

2. Hard disk installation


1) Turn on breaker which is at the left side of Film Scanner of Input Station.
2) BIOS setting
Click F2 key at the display of "ES-2200" in PC's startup screen to go into BIOS setting.
(1) Advanced setting
Check "IDE Configuration Secondary IDE Master" is CD-W540E.
(In case of the proto model, CD-W524E is selected.
(2) Boot setting
Change "Boot Device Priority 1st Boot Device" to [ATAPI CD-ROM].
3) Insert "DS-1000 Application E V1.03R01E CD-ROM 1/2" to CD drive.
4) Save BIOS setting and restart.
5) In startup screen, "CAUTION" will be displayed. Click any button on keyboard.
6)

"Select Norton Ghost2002 License Number" will be displayed. Key in;


31350430BAAB
and click OK.

7) At the left bottom of screen, "Question" will be displayed then click "Yes" key.
8)

"Question" will be displayed again, then click Yes key.


From here, program starts Ghost image restoration process.

9) While it is in restoration, "Span Volume [1] Done" will be displayed.


Insert "DS-1000 Application E V1.01R01 CD-ROM 2/2" to CD drive and click OK.
10) Once it completed the restoration, "No batch missing" will be displayed and
command prompt display, remove CD-ROM and restart Input station PC.
11) Change back BIOS setting to previous one.
12) After restart, if restart request is displayed, click Yes key to restart Input Station PC.

5-2

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

3. Update Film Scanner Driver


(1) Press Ctlr+Alt+Del key to go into "Window security" screen.
(2) Click Logoff.
(3) Once Logon screen displayed,
User name : Administrator
Password : no password (space)
Then click OK.
(4) Insert "DS-1000 System E V1.03R01E CD-ROM" into CD drive.
(5) Open property right-clicking My Computer icon on desk top.
(6) Click "Device manager" in "Hardware" tab.
(7) Click "+" mark on the tree of "DRS Protocol Device", to display "MFS Film Scanner."
(8) Open property of "MFS Film Scanner."
(9) Click "Update driver" button in "Driver" tab.
(10) Once dialog is displayed, click next button.
(11) Select "Display known drivers of this device and select from the list," Open and click
OK.
(12) Click "Have disk" button.
(13) Click "Browse" button, select
C: Program Filesrsystemr1vupRSCANDRIVERMFS.inf
(14) Click Next.
(15) Once "Start installation," then click "Next".
(16) Click completed.
(17) Confirm the driver version "1.0.0.0" or "0.21.2.0" in "Driver" tab.
4. Recognition for CD-ROM.
a) Open the Explore and select below folder.
C: Program FilesrsystemCDR
b) Double click shortcut of CDROMEnable-E in the folder.
Once the error message comes up, click "OK" and retry it.

c) Click "Previous".
5. Restart the Input station
a) Display task bar by clicking on the "Windows" key on the full size keyboard.
b) From the taskbar, Select Start Shut down.
c) Select "Restart" and click OK button.

5-3

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

6. Upgrading of application for Input station


(1) AFC firmware version up
From the Home screen select 2. Maintenance 26 Version up
a) Confirm that referring file is "AFC103r1.mot." If not, click Select file button and
look for the right one.

b) Check AFC column and click download button.


(It takes around 6 min to complete.)
(2) Quit Input Station Application
1) Click Quit button in home screen.
2) Click Quit in end screen.
3) If Post-production procedure is displayed, Cancel Quit.
(3) Shut down of input station.
1) Turn off power switch at the left side of film scanner.
2) Wait for UPS sound (Powering off of input station PC) surely.

5-4

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

7. Post check after upgrading


(1) Confirm the version by 1:Setup / F: Version display
1) Confirm the version on the screen for Input Unit.
The version display for Film scanner, FSDRV.DLL and MFS.SYS may be not the
same as the below image because of the original software version.
V0.67 for Film scanner, V0.21R02 for FSDRV.DLL and V0.07R00 for MFS.SYS
are OK.
2) Confirm the version on the screen for DS-1000.

3) Click "Home"

5-5

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

(2) Post-check after version up


1) Film scanner setup
Mode: 1. Setup 12. Individual setup 122. Setup film scanner
a) Select carrier types in use.
b) Following display, set carrier and click Start setup button.

Follow display for other carriers if any.


2) Print Head calibration
Mode: 1. Setup 12 Individual setup 124 Head calibration
(Note: The MUCS is new chart with gray color and 166mm length.)
3) Print Master channel setup
Mode: 1. Setup 12 Individual setup 125 Master channel setup
4) Input station data backup
a) Mode: 1. Setup 15 Manage data 151 Create backup data copy
b) Select Input Station tab.
c) Confirm that "Specify to which" is C: and D:.
d) Click "Create backup copy" button.
(Backup folder will be created in C:Temp and D:Temp.)

5-6

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

16. DP-1000 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE TO V1.03R01 BY APPLICATION CD-ROM


[Tools]
1) DP-1000 Application J/E V1.03R01 1/2 and 2/2 2 pcs of CD-ROM
2) 1 unit of DS-1000 connected to DP-1000 by LAN
[Procedure]
1. Hard disk installation (Ghost)
1) Turn off at breaker on DP-1000 and DS-1000.
2) Take out both HDD of DP-1000 and HDD (Drive: C) of DS-1000 after beep sound is
gone.
3) Insert HDD of DP-1000 into the drive C on PC for DS-1000
4) Turn on at breaker on DS-1000
5) BIOS setting of DS-1000
Click "F2" key at the "ES-2200" display in PC startup screen to go to BIOS setting.
(1) Advanced setting
Check "IDE Configuration Secondary IDE Master" is CD-W540E.
(In case of the proto model, CD-W524E is selected.
(2) Boot setting
Change "Boot Device Priority 1st Boot Device" to [ATAPI CD-ROM].Boot setting
Boot Device Priority 1st Boot device to [Removable Drive]
Note: You need to return the setting after Ghost, please note the setting here.
6) Insert DP-1000 Application J/E (1/2) CD-ROM in DS-1000 CD drive.
7) Save BIOS setting and restart.
8) When a caution message comes on, click any key.
9) In startup screen, "CAUTION" will be displayed. Click any button on keyboard.
"Select Norton Ghost2002 License Number" will be displayed. Key in;
31350430BAAB
and click OK.
10) At the left bottom of screen, "Question" will be displayed then click "Yes" key.
11) "Question" will be displayed again, then click Yes key.
From here, program starts Ghost image restoration process.
12) While it is in restoration, "Span Volume [1] Done" will be displayed.
Insert "DP-1000 Application J/E V1.03R01 CD-ROM 2/2" to CD drive and click OK.
It will take 10 minutes to restration.
13) Once it completed the restoration, "No batch file Q:>" will be displayed and
command prompt display,
remove CD-ROM and restart Input station PC.
14) Return DS-1000 BIOS setting to original.
15) Turn off the input station.
16) Take out the HDD of DP-1000 in DS-1000 (Drive: C) after beep sound is gone. And
Insert HDD of DP-1000 into the PC for DP-1000. Insert the HDD of DS-1000 back to
the PC of DS-1000.
17) Turn on both DP-1000 and DS-1000.

6-1

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

2. Firmware download; by Printer LCD screen operation


1) PFU BOOT and Printer-CPU BOOT download.
If the current version display is V1.00R1, it is not necessary to version up at this
moment.
If not, refer to the "version up procedure of MCTL BOOT and PFU BOOT"
2) LCD program download
Mode Maintenance Version up LCD program
If current version display is V0.50R1, it is not necessary to version up at this moment.
Select LCD050R1.mot and click start button. It takes 3 min.
3) LCD font data download
Mode Maintenance Version up LCD information
Select language "English", then click start button.
It takes around 90 seconds.
4) Printer-CPU program download
Mode Maintenance Version up Printer-CPU
If current version display is V1.01R1, it is not necessary to version up at this moment.
Select Mctl103R1.mot and click start button.
It takes 4 min.
5) PFU program download
Mode Maintenance Version up PFU-DRV
If current version display is V1.00R1, it is not necessary to version up at this moment.
Select PFU100R1.mot and click start button.
It takes 4 min.
3. Post check after upgrading
(1) Confirm the version by 1:Setup / F: Version display
1) Confirm the version on the screen for Printer Unit.

2) Click "Home"

6-2

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

4. System setting; Printer LCD screen operation


1) Mode Maintenance System configuration setting
2) Select language on system screen.

Selection of Japanese or English

3) Display Developing section screen in "System configuration setting " by selecting


Mode/2.Maintenance/9.System configuration/Processor.

1 Select processor type


(Models are shown in the
following order repeatedly.)
When 868-SQA is selected (NPS868SQA is connected), select
"Present" for P3 temperature
control if optional P3 temperature
control unit is mounted.
2 Press "Rgstr ".

6-3

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

Display name

Processor type

868S-J

NPS-868 Super J

878S-J

NPS-878 Super J, NPS-878 J

868S-SQA

NPS-868 Super SQA

878S-SQA

NPS-878 Super SQA, NPS-878 SQA

828S-SQA

NPS-828 Super , NPS-838 Super

868-SQA

NPS-868SQA

Rules on display name


868 S - SQA
SQA: SQA Type
J: J Type
S: Super
System name

3 "Restart system" window appears. Press "OK".


(The following shows an example when 868S-J is selected.)

4 Wait for 3 to 4 minutes before the PC completes restarting.

6-4

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

17. APPENDIX: CHECK SHEET


3
S/N number check list
Check and record the items that were modified.
<Unit number check sheet> Machine number: (

(1) Input station unit


No.

Unit name

Serial number
Early

Replace 1

Replace 2

Main unit
1

Image scanning section

AFC-CPU Board

DC-TRM Board

ScannerDriving Board

Power supply unit


1

SUP1

SUP2

Light source unit


1

Light source unit

LS-LED-A Board

LS-LED-B Board

PC unit
1

PC unit

Extended keyboard

Flatbed scanner

HUB

CRT

Other
1

Film cleaner

7-1

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

(2) 135AFC
No.

Unit name

Serial number
Early

Replace 1

Replace 2

135AFC
1

135 AFC unit

PD-AMP Board

(3) 240AFC
No.

Unit name

Serial number
Early

Replace 1

Replace 2

240AFC
1

240AFC unit

PD-AMP Board

MAG-AMP Board

(3) Universal carrier


No.

Unit name

Serial number
Early

Replace 1

Replace 2

Universal carrier
1

Universal carrier

7-2

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

[Checking the optical axis in the sub-scan direction (only when UFC is used)]
Shim size check sheet
Shim size (0.1mm units)
Left

Left

Right
front

Evaluation value (Left)


Sort
No.

Shim adjustment size (0.1mm units)


Left
Add when evaluation
when value Left) is -5

Right
Add when evaluation
value (Left) is 5

Initial
After 1st
adjustment
After 2nd
adjustment
After 3rd
adjustment
After 4th
adjustment
After 5th
adjustment

7-3

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

Das könnte Ihnen auch gefallen